JP2019181000A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a specific performance on the basis of detection of either movement from among a plurality of kinds of movements by a player, and a plurality of kinds of movement promotion performances for promoting a corresponding movement as movements corresponding to each of a plurality of kinds of movements, includes selection means capable of selecting a movement promotion performance at predetermined timing before execution of a movement promotion performance in execution of the operation promotion performance, and executes a specific performance on the basis of detection of a movement corresponding to a movement promotion performance executed by the promotion performance execution means by the detection means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-22

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

  Conventionally, it is a gaming machine that can detect a plurality of operations (motions) by a player and can perform an effect in response to the detection of the operation (motion) by the player, and corresponds to each of the plurality of operations (motions). There is one that prompts the player to perform each operation (action) by executing the promotion effect (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-209203 A

  However, in Patent Document 1, since the type of operation (action) to be promoted is determined on the gaming machine side, the operation (action) to be promoted by the player cannot be selected. There is a problem that it is not possible to respond to the preference of the person in charge and it is not possible to improve the game entertainment.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 9-18) capable of detecting a plurality of types of operations (for example, operation of the push button 31B and operation of the stick controller 31A) of the player. Part) and
Specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on detection of any of the plurality of types of actions by the detecting means (for example, the push button shown in FIG. 9-18 by the effect control CPU 120) Part for performing post-operation production execution process and post-operation production execution process for stick controller),
Productions corresponding to each of a plurality of types of motions that can be detected by the detection means, and a plurality of types of motion promotion productions that prompt the user to perform the corresponding motions (for example, FIGS. As shown in (H), a promotion effect execution means (for example, a variable display shown in FIGS. 9-18) capable of executing a push button 31B or a portion corresponding to the stick controller 31A on the first image display device 019SG005A. In the medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of 019SG416),
When the action promotion effect is executed by the promotion effect execution means, a selection means (for example, a type of action promotion effect executed by the promotion effect execution means at a predetermined timing before the action promotion effect is executed (for example, The part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation part selection effect execution process shown in FIG. 9-22),
With
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect based on the fact that the operation corresponding to the motion promotion effect executed by the promotion effect execution means is detected by the detection means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-18) In the effect processing during variable display, if the operation control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation of the selected operation unit (019SGS418; Y), the post-operation effect execution processing for the push button of 019SGS422 and the post-operation effect for the stick controller of 019SGS423 are performed. The part that executes the execution process)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the specific effect is executed by the desired action selected by the player, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The specific effect execution means can execute different specific effects according to the operation selected by the selection means (for example, in the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 9-18, the effect control CPU 120 is selected. When it is determined that the operation unit is the push button 31B (019SGS421; Y), the post-operation effect execution process for the push button of 019SGS422 is executed, and when it is determined that the selected operation unit is the stick controller 31A ( (019SGS421; N) is a part for executing post-operation effect execution processing for stick controller of 019SGS423)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since a specific effect that is different depending on the selected operation is executed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or means 2,
The detecting means includes a first action detecting means (for example, a push button 31B capable of detecting a pressing operation) capable of detecting a first action and a second action detecting means (for example, a tilting operation capable of detecting a second action). A detectable stick controller 31A) and a third motion detecting means capable of detecting a third motion;
In the selection means, it is possible to select either the action promotion effect of the first action or the action promotion effect of the second action by the third action that can be detected by the third action detection means (for example, a cross key). (Operation part for performing an operation for performing a post-operation effect by an operation of 019SG300 can be selected from the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the motion promotion effect is generated by the operation by the third motion detection means different from the first motion detection means and the second motion detection means for detecting the first motion and the second motion that are the targets of the motion promotion effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of selecting the motion promotion effect from becoming difficult to understand.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means to means 3,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect control) is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a portion where the image of the selected operation unit changes to a big hit notification mode) for notifying that the control is in the advantageous state. 22 for performing the process of 019SGS454 of the operation part selection effect execution process shown in FIG.
The notification effect execution means executes the notification effect when the type of motion promotion effect executed by the promotion effect execution means is selected by the selection means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (E)). The portion of the image of the operation unit on the side selected by the player's operation of the cross key 019SG300 changes to the big hit notification mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the unexpectedness of the player can be aroused, the gaming interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 4,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Variable display means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 5) that performs variable display using one variable display pattern among a plurality of types of variable display patterns that are controlled in the advantageous state. Part)
In the selection means, the type of action promotion effect executed by the promotion effect execution means when variable display is being executed with a specific variable display pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display means. Can be selected (for example, when the variable display is executed in the super reach variation pattern, the operation portion selection effect is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the type of motion promotion effect can be selected, so that a sense of expectation for being controlled to be in an advantageous state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 5,
The specific effect executing means restricts execution of the specific effect when an operation different from the operation corresponding to the motion promotion effect executed by the promotion effect executing means is detected by the detecting means (for example, the effect) When the control CPU 120 determines that there is no operation of the operation unit selected in 019SGS418 shown in FIG. 9-18 (019SGS418; N), the post-operation effect execution process for the push button and the post-operation effect execution process for the stick controller are performed. The part not to be executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the selection of the motion promotion effect from being wasted and the game entertainment interest from being lowered.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every jackpot type in a special symbol display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the shift aspect of a 1st holding | maintenance display and a 2nd holding | maintenance display. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every jackpot type in a round indicator. It is a back perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit A), (B) is the explanatory drawing which shows the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a figure which shows the display mode of a display monitor, (C) is explanatory drawing of the display content. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows a game control main process. (A) is a flowchart which shows a RAM clear process, (B) is the schematic of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor at the time of a cold start, (B) shows the display mode of the display monitor at the time of resetting from the power failure during the occurrence of a set value error or setting change FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of the special symbol display apparatus in execution of a setting change process, a pending | holding display apparatus, a right-handed lamp, and a round indicator, and (B) is the time of the occurrence of a setting value abnormality error, or Indicates the change in the display mode of the special symbol display device when returning from a power interruption during setting change It is a figure which shows a part of timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information memorize | stored in RAM, and the state cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial symbol for every received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the alerting | reporting aspect at the time of starting of a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of non-detection operation control and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in operation | movement of operation control at the time of non-detection and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the change end time of a set value, the confirmation end timing of a set value, and the execution frequency of a 1st movable body initialization process and a 2nd movable body initialization process. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control process process. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the positional relationship of a 1st image display apparatus and a 2nd image display apparatus. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the big hit type determination table (for 1st special symbols), (B) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the big hit type determination table (for 2nd special symbols). It is a figure which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data storage area for effect control, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a start winning reception command buffer, (C) is a configuration of an active display buffer FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an active display change effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the production content of an active display change production. (A)-(C) are figures which show the determination ratio of the last display mode of the active display at the time of the 1st active display change determination. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the display mode of an active display, the frequency | count of execution of a roulette effect, and the alerting | reporting stage in a roulette effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the last display mode of the active display at the time of a 2nd active display change determination. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an active display change effect process. (A) to (C) are timing charts showing the execution status of the active display change effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution situation of active display change production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an operation part selection production | presentation execution process. It is a figure which shows the change execution ratio to the jackpot alerting | reporting aspect of the image of the operation part selected in the operation part selection production. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of an active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of an active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of an active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of the operation part selection effect. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of the operation part selection effect. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of the roulette effect as a modification. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the roulette effect as a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy-low base state, and so on. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probable big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  A board other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 is also referred to as a sub board. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpot), start information (startup) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko machine 1 Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on “per-game” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of ordinary symbols is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process in step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When a start winning is generated, a display result (including a jackpot type) and a random value for determining a variation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination are performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic fluctuation time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as the presence or absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. This includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the probability variation state is being controlled and the end of the count-off is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot to be open based on the display result being “hit”. It is. When the big prize opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count has reached the upper limit execution count, The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit ending process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing is ended.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. This small hit opening process is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state and the measured elapsed time. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. Moreover, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the presentation control command etc. which were transmitted from the main board | substrate 11 are performed about the control content of presentation operation | movement using various production | presentation apparatuses.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold storage number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command is received from the main board 11 for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. It is updated to 7 ″, and the big hit effect processing is finished.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding feature 207SG of this embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 207SG of this Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-7, a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge) constituting a game board surface. Board) 2 and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched and driven into the game area from a predetermined ball hitting device. Further, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 has a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window between a door opening position where the front side of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 opens around the left side and a door closing position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a so that the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed.

  In addition, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 207SG002L in which a game ball can flow down. 2 is formed in a right game area 207SG002R in which a game ball can flow down.

  The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is the left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area where a game ball that has been launched more strongly than a game ball that flows down (right-handed) passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

  The left game area 207SG002L is provided with two general winning ports 10, and the right game area 207SG002R has a passing gate 41 and a variable winning ball apparatus 6B from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. Two general winning ports 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game balls flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball apparatus 6A, and the game balls flowing down the right game area 207SG002R are variable. The second start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 can be won and can pass through the passing gate 41. In this feature 207SG, in the left game area 207SG002L, the two general winning ports 10 are provided on the downstream side of the first starting winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, so that the winning ball device 6A Even a game ball that has not won a prize has a possibility of winning a prize in the general prize opening 10.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start prize opening or the big prize opening, and the game balls flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first start prize opening. It has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-7, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state. In addition, the main board 11 includes a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value changing state that can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (outtake rate) described later in the setting value changing state. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value and an opening sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a shop clerk or the like can check the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state) It is also.

  The setting switch main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052, is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that the operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

  Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation is extremely difficult when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed, and a predetermined door key is pressed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires an operation of a setting key owned by a game shop clerk or the like, only the clerk possessing the setting key can be operated. Also, the lock switch 207SG051 is a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation to be described later with a setting key. In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this Embodiment, although the door key and the setting key have illustrated the form which is a separate key, these may be combined with 1 key.

  The substrate case 207SG201 is provided with a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is disposed on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is disposed on the front surface when the main substrate 11 is visually recognized in the substrate case 207SG201. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 opened. It is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is A first special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of executing a variable display of one special figure, a second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing a variable display of a second special figure, and a first reserved display capable of displaying a first reserved memory number 207SG025A, a second reserved display unit 207SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved memory number, a normal symbol display unit 207SG020 capable of executing a variation display of the normal symbol, a general figure reserved display unit 207SG025C capable of displaying the general figure reserved memory number, Round indicator 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (type of jackpot) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, high base state (short time state) and jackpot game A right-handed lamp 207SG132 that is turned on in a gaming state in which a game ball in a state or the like is launched toward the right gaming area 207SG002R, a probability-changing lamp 207SG133 that is lit when in a probable state, and a short-time lamp 207SG134 that is lit in a high base state (short-time state). A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variation display result of the special symbol is lost or small hit, the variation display result can be derived and displayed in a common combination. ing.

  In the case where the fluctuation display result is a big hit in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A displays the fluctuation display result with two types of big hit symbols (a combination of LEDs that are lit) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. In the case where the fluctuation display result is a big hit in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B displays the fluctuation with two types of big hit symbols (a combination of LEDs that are lit) for each big hit type. Results and derivation can be displayed.

  In the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B all have different jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B can be at least partially overlapped.

  As shown in FIG. 8-5, each of the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B has four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, if the number of reserved memories is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and the second from the left as the number of reserved memories increases, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left turn on sequentially. Each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold indicator corresponding to the variable display is changed in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment) according to the decrease of the stored memory (consumed). In part 207SG, the light is turned off in the left direction.

  In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory is executed with priority. It is like. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-6, for example, when there is one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 207SG025A) Is on and the left two LEDs of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are turned on), the second special figure hold memory is zero by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure holding memory is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the round indicator 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). The big hit types in the feature 207SG of the present embodiment include three big hit types, a big hit A which is a big hit of 5 rounds, a big hit B which is a big hit of 10 rounds, and a big hit C which is a big hit of 15 rounds. Depending on the type of jackpot, which of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is turned on differs.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. LED control commands used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  In addition, the effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can be operated between the origin position and the effect position during variable display, and the like. An origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. An origin detection sensor 207SG332 capable of detecting this is connected.

  FIG. 8-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature section 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), the command 8001H is a first change start command for designating the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a change display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a change display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), a determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. ) Or different EXT data is set in accordance with a determination result (a jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of jackpot types when the variation display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit B”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C”. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating stoppage (decision) of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time reduction control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and the command 9501H is a gaming state in which time reduction control is performed (high base state) , The second gaming state designation command corresponding to the short time state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormality) has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big prize opening notifying that it is a period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set in accordance with the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the big winning mouth opening notification command and the big winning mouth opening notification command, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. The second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the first starting condition is satisfied by passing (entering) the game ball through the first starting winning opening. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved memory number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from main board 11 to effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (it is also called a power failure recovery, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the setting value changing operation has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting value changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value changing operation has ended in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a setting value check start notification command for notifying that the setting value checking operation has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting value checking state). The command E106H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates the numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information are configured.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-9, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the normal display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  In this embodiment, each random number value MR1 to MR5 is exemplified as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-9, but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 8-10 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is “losing”, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, Corresponding to the case where the display result is “big hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variation display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach lose variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 8-10, the special reach variation pattern of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is performed in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment is represented by super reach α and super reach β that are super reach variation patterns. Is set shorter. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the change pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed However, the special figure variation time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach production of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the fluctuation display result is set to “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation is set high. In the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the expectation of jackpot.

  Note that, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are set by changing the type of the fluctuation pattern such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, or the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination first, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and these variations are determined. The variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after first determining the variation pattern type from the random number for pattern type determination It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 207SG of this Embodiment, as shown to FIGS. 8-10, although the variation content (effect content) is previously determined for every variation pattern, this invention has shown to this. The present invention is not limited, and the variation content (effect content) may be different even for the same variation pattern according to the set value that has been set. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern is a normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times and the change pattern becomes super reach loss ...

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-13 and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), and FIG. -11 (C) display result determination table (set value 3), display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), and display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 8-12 (B). Set value 5), display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 8-12 (C), jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), FIG. B) Big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in B), big hit variation pattern determination table, small hit variation pattern determination table, loss variation pattern determination table, general diagram display result determination table (not shown), general diagram Variation pattern determination Buru is included (not shown) and the like.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process described later, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases step by step as the values decrease in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, the set value is a value that is the most unfavorable for the game hall side, which is 6 which is the largest value, and is a value that is more advantageous for the game hall as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Become.

  FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and FIGS. 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the respective set values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the feature section 207SG of the present embodiment, the common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A) to FIG. 8-11 (C) and FIG. 8-12 (A) to FIG. 8-12 (C), in each display result determination table, the gaming state is a probable change state ( In the high accuracy state), more judgment values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of “big hit” than in the normal state or the short time state (low accuracy state). As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as the “big hit” in the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) to control the big hit gaming state. Then, the probability determined (in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and the setting Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the setting value is 5, and 1/200 when the setting value is 6, the special figure display result is controlled as a big hit gaming state. Then, the probability of determination increases (in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/20 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3. 160, 1/140 when set value is 4, set If it is 5 1/120, 1/100 in the case of setting value of 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state compared to the normal state or the short time state The determination value is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

  In addition, in each display result determination table, a determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “small hit” and controlling to the small hit gaming state is the same regardless of the gaming state and the set value. It has been. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (A) to FIG. 8-11 (C) and FIG. 8-12 (A) to FIG. 8-12 (C), regardless of the gaming state and the set value, The probability of determining that the special figure display result is “small hit” and controlling to the small hit gaming state is set to 1/200. In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, although the special figure display result is “small hit” regardless of the set value, the probability that it is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” and controlled to the small hit gaming state may be varied according to the set value.

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit gaming state is controlled. The determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “big hit” and controlling to the big hit gaming state is higher as the set value is lower (high hit probability: set value 6> set value) 5> set value 4> set value 3> set value 2> set value 1).

  In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value is changed from FIG. 8-11 (A) to FIG. 8-11 (C) and FIG. When it matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in (A) to FIG. 8-12 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). In addition, MR1 matches one of the hit judgment values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and FIGS. 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C). Then, it is decided to make a small hit for the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and FIGS. 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C) are probabilities (proportions) and small hits to be big hits. The probability (ratio) of becoming. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, but in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 causes the display results shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and FIGS. 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C). Whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit using a judgment table is determined, but a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value, and whether the fluctuation display result is a big hit Whether or not to make a small hit may be determined individually.

  In the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less, or 7 or more.

  8-13 (A) and FIG. 8-13 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, FIG. 8-13 (A) determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when doing. Further, FIG. 8-13 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Table.

  The big hit type determination table is one of the big hit types A to C based on the random number for determining the hit type (MR2) when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine.

  Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as a non-probability variable big hit) in which only the time-shortening control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends and shifts to a low probability high base state, A big hit B and big hit C (also called a probable big hit) are set in which the high-accuracy control and the short-time control are executed after the completion and the state shifts to the high-accuracy high-base state.

  The big hit game state by “hit A” is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by “B” is a normally open big hit which is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by “hit C” is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time-saving control executed after the end of the big hit gaming state by the “big hit A” is executed by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment) of the special game, or the predetermined number of special times. The game ends when the big hit gaming state is entered before the game is executed.

  On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-shortening control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C is continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big hit gaming state ends. Therefore, when the big hit that is generated again is the big hit B or big hit C, since the high-accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit gaming state is continuously performed without going through the normal state. The so-called villa state occurs.

  In the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, three types of big hit A to big hit C are illustrated as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is 2 You may provide below the kind or four or more kinds.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “3”, out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “4”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A in the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 299, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the big hit B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. Also, when the set value is “5”, 0 to 99 of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the big hit B. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “6”, 0 to 99 of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C.

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol, the ratio for determining the big hit A in which only the short time control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the short time control after the big hit game ends. Of the big hits B and big hits C for which both of the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special chart is the first special symbol, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the highest when the set value is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the big hit B. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. Also, when the set value is “3”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A in the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 299, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the big hit B. 160 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “4”, out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to jackpot B. 140 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “5”, 0 to 99 of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the big hit B. 120 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “6”, out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. (No judgment value is assigned to big hit B).

  In this way, when a big win occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, while the ratio for determining the big hit A in which only the short time control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, the short time control after the big hit game ends Of the big hits B and big hits C for which both of the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special figure is the second special symbol, the setting value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the highest when the setting value is 6, and the setting value is 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  In the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation special chart is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined as the big hit B. The form that does not do is illustrated, that is, that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value, it means that any jackpot type is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) Although it is included, even when the variation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, a case where the big hit type is determined as the big hit B may be provided. .

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit differs according to the set value that is set, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

  In the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2, which is a random value for determining the big hit type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random value for special figure display result determination.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous for the player (the higher the probability of jackpot, the easier it is to determine the jackpot C as the jackpot type) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game performance (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal state loops at a rate of 1/320 and the probability variation state is 65%, When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 during the big hit game. The game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to be a probable change state based on passing the game, while the game balls having different proportions of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the fluctuation figure (so-called V If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is in the high base (during short-time control). Specially variable ball A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameability is the same, but the big hit probability or There may be provided a setting (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6) with a small number of winning balls that can be acquired during the big hit game while the small hit probability is high. .

  Further, in this way, when the gameability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is used as an effect switch (every game ball passes a predetermined area). Used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a gaming switch (the game state is changed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch) It may be used as a switch for controlling to the big hit gaming state.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, and the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. Are prepared in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “lost”. ing.

  In the big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns of normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β big hit variation pattern (PB1-3) are included. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-15 (A) and 8-15 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table is a big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the big hit type is big hit A. And a big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) that are used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance. A) and the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), the variation pattern for normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern for super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and the big hit for super reach β big hit For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined value out of a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. A random value is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 8-15 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value ranges from 1 to 997. Up to 400 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for normal reach big hit, 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) for super reach α big hit, and 85 to 997 are super reach. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per β big hit. When the set value is “2”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) per normal reach, and 381 to 835 are assigned. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “3”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) per normal reach big hit, and 361 to 820. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “4”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 340 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) per normal reach, and 341 to 805 are assigned. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “5”, the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, from 321 to 790. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “6”, the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for the normal reach big hit, from 301 to 775. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big.

  As shown in FIG. 8-15 (B), in the big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 judgment value ranges from 1 to 997. 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for normal reach big hit, 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) for super reach α big hit, and 551 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 1 to 180 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for the normal reach big hit, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big hit. Also, when the set value is “3”, 1 to 160 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big hit. When the set value is “4”, 1 to 140 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “5”, 1 to 120 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 121 to 390 are the same. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “6”, 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 101 to 350 is the range. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big.

  Thus, when the big hit A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit Higher and lower in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the big hit B or big hit C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) for the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) for the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are the big hit type “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, a player who may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the sense of expectation.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random value out of a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern of the variation pattern (PC1-1) for small hits is a determination value. Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the MR3 determination value range of 0 to 997 is used when the set value is any one of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the small hit variation pattern. You may determine the small fluctuation pattern with the setting value 1-6 from a several fluctuation pattern in a different ratio.

  The loss variation pattern determination table includes a loss variation pattern determination table A that is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in a low base state in which the game state is not subjected to time reduction control, and a low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D that is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time-shortening control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for losing, the non-reach losing variation pattern (PA1-1), the normal reach losing variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α losing variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss in a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

  As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low-base total sum storage number), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value Among the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are allocated to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are allocated to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. When the set value is “2”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 are included. Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the range 1 to 997, and 411 to 700 are set. Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 390 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 are assigned. Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1). Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3).

  Also, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to a total number of reserved memories of 2 to 4. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern determining random value MR3 for the α loss variation pattern (PA2-2) and the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), if the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. When the set value is “2”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700 are Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) in the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997, and 461 to 700 are included. Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 440 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are included. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are included. Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 400 are allocated to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700 are included. Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3).

  Also, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total reserved memory number of 5 to 8. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern determining random value MR3 for the α loss variation pattern (PA2-2) and the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 8-16 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for the number of low base medium total pending storages of 5 or more), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value Among the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are allocated to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are allocated to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. When the set value is “2”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 are the same. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 are the same. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 490 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are the same. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “5”, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) in the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, and 471 to 700 are included. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (corresponding to the time reduction control) ( PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (D), in the variation pattern determination table for loss D (for high base medium), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach lose pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach lose pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are the super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the loss, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. Also, when the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4) in the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, and 531 to 700 are. Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 are assigned. Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3).
When the set value is “4”, 1 to 490 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are included. Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “5”, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4) in the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, and 471 to 700 are included. Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are assigned. Normal reach loss pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β change pattern ( PA2-3).

  As described above, when the loss variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern, and the ratio for determining the normal reach variation pattern. Are set so as to decrease in the order of setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for losing, regardless of the variation pattern determining table, among the determination values, 701 to 900 are the variation pattern of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β loss. If the fluctuation pattern is assigned to each fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the presentation effect from deteriorating due to the fact that the variable display by is not executed.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination pattern of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are completely the same between the set values as the variation pattern for loss However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are between the set values. May be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

  Note that, in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the determination example of the determination pattern of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is lost, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of any variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach α is obtained when the variable display result is lost. The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Also, in the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern for the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the non-reach and normal reach variation pattern determination ratios differ depending on the set value that is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undecided variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern varies depending on the set value is that any variation pattern is not determined (the determination proportion is 0%) or a specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine at a rate of

  The non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach loss variation more than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter variation time (see FIG. 8-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, a non-reach loss variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, a winning prize makes it difficult to generate a useless starting prize that is not reserved, and when the number of reserved words decreases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening with a long fluctuation time ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed by increasing the time of the variable display.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 207SG of this Embodiment, as shown to FIGS. 8-16 (A)-FIG. 8-16 (D), it fluctuates using the variation pattern determination table for loss which changes according to the total number of pending storage. Although the form which determines a pattern is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The number of holding | maintenance memory | storage in the special symbol of a fluctuation | variation object (For example, when performing the fluctuation | variation display of a 1st special symbol, it is 1st. The variation pattern may be determined by using a variation pattern determination table for losing that differs depending on the number of special symbols held and the variation display of the second special symbol.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for losing of the feature part 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the variation pattern of the super reach losing The ranges of random number values assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the change display is actually executed in the change pattern of the super reach loss (the change pattern of the super reach loss) (Appearance rate) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the form in which the change display is executed in the change pattern of the super reach lose according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the change display shows the change in the super reach loss. It may be executed in a pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8A may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure hold storage unit, a second special figure hold storage unit, a general figure hold storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit is a special figure that has not yet started even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. Hold data of a game (a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit establishes the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball in association with the hold number in the order of winning (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening. The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variation pattern extraction extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the The number is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) To hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to win a big hit.

  The second special figure holding storage unit has a start prize (second start prize) that has not yet started even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start prize port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B. The hold data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit establishes the second start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball in association with the hold number in the order of winning (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening. Based on the random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on The number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the fluctuation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) To hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to win a big hit.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the passing of the game ball through (entering) the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passed (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The usual figure holding storage unit stores the holding information of the usual figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure hold storage unit associates with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passing gate, and is used for determining the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so as to be updatable by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are periodically updated according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. Alternatively, the random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8-17 (A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. Each of the first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E is configured by 7 segments configured by seven segments that draw a character “8” and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short period.

  In addition, the display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment is executed using a non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is tested. .

  In the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (B) and 8-17 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls in all gaming states Base L that is (real-time value during measurement), Base 1 that is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each first out 6000 balls in all gaming states, and all gaming states Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) every third 6000 balls in all gaming states It is possible to display the base 3, which is the base value calculated in (1). Base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 are displayed on display monitor 207SG029 as percentages.

  When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “L.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display “bL.” Which is an abbreviation of the base L. ”Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values“ 00 ”to“ 99 ”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “1.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display “b1.”, Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “2.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display “b2.” Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “3.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display “b3.” Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

  In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2 and the base 3 is executed under the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the main board 11 executes control for switching the display on the display monitor 207SG029 at intervals of 5 seconds in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3. The display of each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is different in display color according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine When the set value set to 1 is “2”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “3”, it is displayed. Each base value in the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “4”, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the set value set to “5” is displayed, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red and set to the pachinko gaming machine 1. If the set value is "6" displays the base value in the display monitor 207SG029 at purple. For this reason, the game shop clerk and the like can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the set value changing process described later. ing.

  Next, the game control main process in the characteristic part 207SG of this Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial setting is performed (207SGSa002). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). When the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or when the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017 and the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether a normal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

  When the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and when the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) Whether or not a setting value changing flag indicating that a setting value changing process (to be described later) was being executed before the interruption (that a power interruption occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. Is judged (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017. If the setting value changing flag is not set, a RAM clear flag indicating that a RAM clear process described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is operated. (207SGSa008).

  When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), RAM clear processing for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

  In 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the opening sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the lock switch 207SG051 turned on and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa013a).

  When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the setting value changing process (207SGSa013b) for changing the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014, and the RAM clear flag is set. Is not set (207SGSa013a; N), a setting value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

  If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processing of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

  In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag has been set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 has been cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) has been executed) ( 207SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is changed to the power supply stop (power interruption). Recovery processing for returning to the state is performed (207SGSa015).

  In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be. And CPU103 transmits the command at the time of a recovery including a hot start notification command with respect to the production | presentation control board 12, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered in the state before power interruption (hot start), and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

  In 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal set value is not set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a formal procedure by the operation of a game hall employee or the like (the pachinko gaming machine 207SG003 is opened and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while operating the clear switch) When the machine 1 is activated), the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). And the process of 207SGSa009-207SGSa016 mentioned above is performed.

  When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and when the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

  Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are set. Cold start notification is started by starting flashing (207SGSa024).

  After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has expired (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGSa026 is repeated, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029 Blinks (207SGSa027), and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

  The feature 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over a period of a cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may blink. In addition, at least some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be lit.

  Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing (207SGSa028) for initial setting of the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029), and an interrupt is permitted (207SGSa030). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  Further, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 determines whether or not an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), or after returning from a power interruption during setting change to be described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the set value abnormality is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by −1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has expired (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processing of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), FIG. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B that constitute the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) that a set value abnormality error has occurred or that a power failure has occurred during a setting change. , “E.” is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a game hall management computer via a terminal board (not shown) provided at 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until the power interruption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. The error notification by the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is executed.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment has the display monitor 207SG029, the first monitor when the abnormal set value is set or the power is interrupted while the set value is changed. Since the error occurrence notification is executed by the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can generate errors and set values from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power has been restored from the power interruption during the change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the return from the power interruption while the set value is being changed can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

  In the game control main process of the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. The mode of executing the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) after clearing the flag is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM clear process If it is determined in 207SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (20 SGSa014; Y) to be executed.

  FIG. 8-21 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, “00H” is set (stored) at the designated address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). When the designated address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is designated (207SGSa044), and the designated address is an address (F002) storing the RAM clear flag. (207SGSa45).

  If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the next step is further performed. Is designated and the process proceeds to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the designated address is the last address in the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear process is terminated.

  Note that the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is assigned addresses (F000 to FXXX) for each storage area, as shown in FIG. Among these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored at the top address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the top of the RAM 102 will be described later. Temporary setting values are stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). In other addresses (F003 and later), special figure hold memory, general figure hold memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and game information including error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored. . The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among areas where other information is stored. In addition, a value indicating the factory shipment state (for example, set value “0”) is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. Note that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in a state where the value indicating the factory shipment state is set at the top address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail. You may be prompted to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by display on the display device 5 or the like.

  That is, the RAM clear process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing “00H” in an address excluding the set value.

  Note that the feature 207SG in the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clear process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When activated at the start, only game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (after the address F003 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

  In addition, in the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, an example in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is stored in the game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted, The processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

  FIG. 8-22 is a flowchart showing the setting value changing process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value changing process, first, the CPU 103 starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the first hold indicator. 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa052, see FIG. 8-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 sets only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode that is neither big hit A, big hit B, or big hit C shown in FIG. 8-6). Starts to light (207SGSa052a).

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether any value 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as a setting value in the RAM 102, or when a setting value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the setting value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the setting value is set at the address F000 in the RAM 102. Then, “1” is set (setting value is reset to “1”), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any value 1 ^ & is stored as a set value in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

  In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power-off detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power-off detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has expired (207SGSa056). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056; Y). Performs power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

  After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer at the game hall (207SGSa059).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets a setting value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). When there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. The contents are updated (207SGSa063).

  Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a setting value advantageous to the player by one step over the “1”, is set as a temporary setting value. If the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is “2”, “3”, which is a setting value advantageous to the player by one step over the “2”, is temporarily set. A numerical value that is one larger than the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored as the setting value at the address F001 of the RAM 102, is stored as the borrowing setting at the address F001 of the RAM 102. When the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is “6”, “1” may be stored as a temporary setting value at the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  The CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or to store it in the address F001. The setting value displayed is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the setting value (or provisional setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary setting value is stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). When the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and when the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; Y), further in the RAM102. It is determined whether or not the setting value stored in the address F000 is different from the provisional setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070).

  When the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is the same as the provisional setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM102. When the set value value stored in the address F001 differs from the set value value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is set to the address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

  FIG. 8-23 is a flowchart illustrating the setting value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa102, see FIG. 8-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 sets only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation processing (a mode that is neither big hit A, big hit B, or big hit C shown in FIG. 8-6). Starts to light (207SGSa103).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value check start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power-off detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power-off detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power-off detection processing execution start waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power-off detection processing execution start waiting timer has expired (207SGSa107). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107; Y). Performs a power-off detection process (207SGSa108). The power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same process as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

  After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer at the game hall (207SGSa110).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is terminated (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. Are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value check end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the set value check process.

  As described above, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, and the round indicator 207SG131 are turned on, and the first hold indicator 207SG025A, second from the start of the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing. By starting blinking of the hold indicator 207SG025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, a player, a game shop clerk, etc. can change the set value or the set value from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

  It should be noted that, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the setting value change process and the setting value confirmation process, as a mode corresponding to the setting value change process and the setting value confirmation process, However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is the big hit A, big hit shown in FIG. 8-6. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it does not correspond to either B or big hit C.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), at the start of the set value change process and the set value check process, an aspect according to the set value change process and the set value check process As an example, the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 are lit in the same manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 are set value change You may light in the aspect which is different at the time of the start of a process, and the time of the start of a setting value confirmation process.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (disconnected) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is opened with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 opened. And the clear switch are turned on to execute the setting value changing process.

  At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 8-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different number of display units when executing the set value changing process at the time of activation and when displaying the base value after the activation is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, display of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated in the state where the setting value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D as described above, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (powered off) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. Setting value confirmation processing is executed by setting (clear switch OFF).

  At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (A), FIG. 8-25 (B), and FIG. 8-25 (E), the first power is turned off by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 8-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies when the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of activation and when the base value is displayed after the activation is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, display of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Note that the display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play.

  FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart illustrating the power interruption detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the setting value change process and the setting value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has decreased to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). If there is no power-off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process ends. If there is a power-off signal input (207SGS081; Y), backup data including setting value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), the specified backup data is stored in a backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, check data used when restoring the backup data is created and stored in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

  In the game control timer interrupt process in the feature part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed later.

  Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

  FIG. 8-29 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and also sets the CTC (counter / timer mounted on the effect control board 12). Circuit) register setting, etc.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer corresponding to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has expired (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; N), the processing of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 is repeatedly executed and waits until the command reception waiting timer expires.

  When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is recovered from the power interruption, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player in the player information input process described later) After receiving the input of information, information including the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of superreach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  When no hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When a cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), player information and presentation information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots stored in the RAM 122 since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, (Information including the number of times of super reach) (207SGS409), the information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 are cleared. A RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 in the image display device 5 are cleared as shown in the image on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIGS. Display of the notification image 207SG005M1) to notify that, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the store clerk of the game hall that started the pachinko gaming machine For example, it is only necessary to notify that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 are cleared. Then, after the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  If no cold start notification command is received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A setting value related notification process is executed to execute notification that the operation is being performed (notification while the setting value is being changed) and notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification that the setting value is being confirmed) (207SGS412).

  Note that in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (B) and FIG. The notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting change value is being updated and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. A state where the game machine clerk 207SG003 is generally open, and a store clerk or the like who changes or confirms the setting value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in a state of being. That is, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which an image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized from a store clerk or the like of the game hall that changes or confirms the set value. From the display on the image display device 5, it is considered that the game shop clerk cannot determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. Therefore, as notification during setting value change and notification during setting value confirmation, a pachinko gaming machine is provided to a store clerk who changes or confirms the setting value by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R or light emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may alert | report that 1 has started in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state.

  In addition, the production control CPU 120 performs a first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body initialization for checking the operation of the second movable body 207SG322. The process (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. (See FIG. 8-35).

  Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-33 and 8-34. FIG. 8-33 is a schematic explanatory diagram illustrating operation modes of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. FIGS. 8A and 34B are explanatory diagrams showing the control speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation, and FIG. 8-B is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the non-detection operation control.

  The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between their respective origin positions (first positions) and presentation positions (second positions). The forward movement to the second position) and the return movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during the variable display.

  When the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed, the production control CPU 120 does not detect the detected parts of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332, that is, the movable If the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the amusement island, the origin cannot be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the motor is removed The movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 has moved from the origin position due to the vibration of the gaming machine (such as when a movable body error (operational abnormality) such as failure to confirm or return to origin) occurs due to adjustment, failure, or catching Other than the origin position depending on the (For example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the merged position, such as a position indicated by a black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 8-22). To do. When the non-detection operation control is executed, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located away from the origin position, and therefore, the operation is only an operation of moving the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 in the origin position direction.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 detects non-detection operation control in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation check operation control is executed. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same operation as the actual operation actually performed in an effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, a movable body effect executed during variable display).

  Next, the control speed set when the production control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 8-34 (A) and 8-34 (B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the movable body 207SG321. , 207SG322 is different from the actual operation speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, even when the same control speed is set for one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the effect position, one movement section And other moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), and when moving up and down even in the same moving section, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322. The operating speed when actually operating may be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there is a difference in the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, each movable body 207SG321 , 207SG322 do not necessarily have the same actual operating speed. In the case where a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, the size, weight, When there is a difference in operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), when performing the actual operation check operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer in the set actual operation check process data. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed to accelerate after the origin position and then decelerate to stop at the effect position, and to accelerate after the effect position to decelerate and stop to the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the production position → Change from high speed to low speed. In other words, when the production control CPU 120 executes the production using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the first speed is the lowest speed (low speed) and the second speed is higher than the lowest speed (high speed). In order to control the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 to operate at a speed within the range of, the minimum speed (low speed), which is the first speed, and the minimum speed even when executing the operation control for actual operation confirmation Control is performed so that each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 operates at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the fast second speed.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speed is set to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operation speed. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 operate at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, the maximum speed is achieved. Will be described as operating.

  Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration is the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 207SG321 is controlled by controlling to be the lowest speed in the action control for actual operation confirmation over a longer time than when stopping at the effect position. The detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 after the 207SG322 is decelerated reliably.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-34 (B), when performing the non-detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. Therefore, control is always performed so as to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the action control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control that is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds always set in the actual operation check operation control so that the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control is obtained. Control for operating the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is performed.

  In this case, since it is unclear how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located from the origin position, if the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located in the vicinity of the origin position, When operating at a high control speed, that is, at a high speed, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected part or move from a short distance. Since the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by an impact when the bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 return to the origin position and are restricted from moving, the operation is performed at the lowest speed in the actual operation check operation control. Control.

  Returning to FIG. 8-29, after performing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. It is determined whether or not a set value early change end flag indicating that the change or check of the set value has been completed is set (207SGS415). If the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not a set value change end notification command or a set value check end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412. When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; Y) Proceeds to 207SGS417. If the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the process of 207SGS416.

  In 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 has ended (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If it is present (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). When the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and when the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS419; Y), the set value early change ends. It is determined whether or not a flag is set (207SGS420).

  When the set value early change end flag gusset is set in 207SGS420 (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) which is the same process as 207SGS413 is performed. Then, the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) that is the same process as 207SGS414 is executed, and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), 207SGS414, and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) are performed. It is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS424). When initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed. (207SGS424; Y) proceeds to 207SGS427.

  As described above, with regard to the processing of 207SG412-207SG424, as shown in FIG. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state), the setting value change notification and the notification during setting value confirmation are started, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are started. Execute. As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 207SG321 has the first movable body initialization process. The operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed after the operation check is completed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sends a set value change end notification command or a set value check end notification command to the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. When received, that is, when the setting value change or the setting value confirmation is completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second The movable body initialization process is executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (B), the effect control is performed at the timing when only the first movable body initialization process is completed among the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. When the CPU 120 receives a set value change end notification command or a set value check end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is finished, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is still finished. When the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in the absence of the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed again after the second movable body initialization process is completed. It is like that.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), the production control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value check end notification command at a timing when the first movable body initialization process has not yet ended. In other words, if the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in a state where the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 has not been completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initial being executed Only the initialization process is executed, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed again.

  If there is no reception of the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command in 207SGS411 (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command has been received (207SGS425). . When the error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification process (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error designation command is executed, and when the error designation command is not received (207SGS425; N). , 207SGS403.

  As the error notification in the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (D), the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command is displayed on the image display device 5. Good.

  As described above, in the effect control main process in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start, player information (the player information The number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reaches, etc. since the input of the game is cleared from the RAM 122, while the production information (the number of fluctuations since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of jackpots, the number of super reaches, etc.) ) And set value information (any numerical value of “1” to “6” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) is not cleared from the RAM 122. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is already stored in the RAM 122. The set value information is overwritten (updated and stored).

  That is, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a set value confirmation state, or a set value change state. Yes.

  Then, in 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which one of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, and the image display device 5 receives the reception. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the command is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-31, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is not set, display of decorative symbols is started with the combination of “1”, “2”, and “3” from the left on the image display device 5 as initial symbols. If the received command is a set value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 will receive “ Display of decorative symbols is started with a combination of “4”, “5”, and “6”.

  In the feature portion 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” ”And“ 6 ”are illustrated as examples of starting the display of decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting value (for example,“ 6 ”) advantageous to the player is provided. If it is set, a combination of “4”, “5”, and “6” is used as the initial symbol at a higher rate than when the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “1”) is set. It may be displayed. By doing in this way, it can be suggested that the set value advantageous to the player is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  In the feature portion 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” ”And“ 6 ”are illustrated as examples of starting the display of decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting value (for example,“ 6 ”) advantageous to the player is provided. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different between the case where the setting value is set and the case where the setting value unfavorable to the player (for example, “1”) is set. In addition, when a setting value (for example, “6”) advantageous for the player is set and when a setting value (for example, “1”) unfavorable for the player is set, the speakers 8L and 8R You may make it vary the volume of the sound to output, the light quantity of the game effect lamp | ramp 9, etc. FIG.

  Then, returning to FIG. 8-29, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” to the prefetch restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the prefetch notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes an activation notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated (207SGS431). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If this is the first interruption since the start of the pachinko machine 1, it is determined whether a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, or a set value check end notification command is received, The activation notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the activation notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after starting the start notification process timer, the start notification process is executed at the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. What is necessary is just to perform alerting | reporting.

  In the feature 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is any one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value check end notification command. Depending on whether or not there is an activation notification mode for the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-32, when a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, a new one is added to the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and outputs the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Note that the light emission start timing for 60 seconds of these game effect lamps 9 and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds may be different.

  Further, when a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and data in the RAM 102 is cleared The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and outputs the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Note that the light emission start timing for 60 seconds of these game effect lamps 9 and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timings of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds may be different.

  In other words, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 60 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output sound for 30 seconds. Includes both performing the output of B.

  Further, when the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output sound C is output and a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed) is displayed on the image display device 5. It should be noted that the light emission start timing for 40 seconds of these game effect lamps 9, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when a set value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, a hot start notification command or a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. In contrast, since a message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, although the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is illustrated using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5, it is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a game hall management computer or each counter, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As an activation notification at the time, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, a part of the apparatus that performs the activation notification is common even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in any of hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state. Although there is an example of a mode in which light emission from the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed in any case, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that performs the activation notification differs depending on whether it is activated in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, a signal is output from the external output terminal to the management device. It may be, or the like) that.

  Moreover, you may vary the alerting | reporting aspect in each apparatus which performs starting alerting | reporting according to whether the pachinko game machine 1 was started by hot start, cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are caused to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in a setting change state. In some cases, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be caused to emit light.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, so that sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers), and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound output from all the speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as “setting changing”, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 When starting at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 is cleared, such as “RAM is cleared”.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-described external output terminals, the terminals that output signals to the management device may be made different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, a period until the change of the set value is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the set value designation command is received) as the setting value change notification. A signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change to the management device over a period of time, and after the change of the setting value is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification.

  In addition, when using an external output terminal in common with each alerting | reporting, you may make it vary the timing which outputs a signal with respect to a management apparatus according to each alerting | reporting.

  As described above, in the start notification process, the form in which the start notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The activation notification may be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. Moreover, although the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as being executed when any of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, and a set value change end notification command is received. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of these hot start notification commands, cold start notification commands, setting value confirmation end notification commands, and setting value change end notification commands may be received even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is received. You may provide the command which does not perform starting alerting | reporting.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, activation notification in a different mode is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may all differ depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part of them may be the same.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start, activated by a cold start, activated by a setting change state, or activated by a setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or in a setting confirmation state, the start notification is performed. May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8-29, next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a power-off detection process (207SGS432). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 8-37, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value. (207SGS441). When there is no power-off signal input (207SGS441; N), the process is terminated. When there is a power-off signal input (207SGS441; Y), the set value information and player information stored in the RAM 122 are stored. The backup data to be included is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, check data used when restoring the backup data is created and stored in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

  Returning to FIG. 8-29, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag in accordance with the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 8-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process (207SGS435) for updating a counter value for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number, an player information input process (207SGS436) for receiving input of player information, and a game A player information output process (207SGS437) for outputting player information and an effect information aggregating process (207SGS438) for adding effect information are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S52.

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the player by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B (password generated in an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and can receive the generated password, and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Furthermore, the CPU 120 for effect control updates and stores the number of changes, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as player information stored each time the change display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

  In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. After the display of the two-dimensional code, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. Note that the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information accumulated in the current game to an external server, whereby a pachinko gaming machine The accumulated player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of changes, the number of jackpots, the number of super reach, and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information every time the variable display, jackpot game, and super reach are executed. To do.

  Next, the effect control process process in the characteristic part 207SG of this Embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 8-38, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetch restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the prefetch restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451; Y), after performing the prefetch notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is performed according to the effect control process flag. This process is executed.

  Further, when the value of the prefetch restriction counter is any one of “1” to “4” (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452). ). When the value of the production control process flag is “0”, “2” to “7” (207SGS452; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the production control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452; Y), the value of the prefetch restriction counter is decremented by 1 (207SGS453), and S170 to S177 ( One of the processes is executed (see FIG. 7). As described above, by executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after startup, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the feature part 207SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process on the basis of the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereby the variable display is performed four times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 determines whether or not the start winning prize determination process is performed based on the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 5) is not executed, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four fluctuation displays.

  As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game is possible in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four variable displays. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that the game is possible, the sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game are set as the settings related to the game progress. The light quantity of the effect lamp 9, the setting of effects according to the RTC, and the like may be set to the factory default state.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the effect control CPU 120 has the reach effect of super reach A and super reach B as the first suggestion effect, Super Reach C and Super Reach D reach production as the second suggestion can be performed, and when Super Reach C and Super Reach D reach production are performed, Super Reach C and Super Reach D Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 207SG. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since it is notified only on the liquid crystal screen that it is in the set state, it is not possible to suitably notify that it is in the set state. There was a problem. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 207SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22) ,
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can at least perform variable display. Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated) Transition to a setting state in which settings can be made (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-22)
In the setting state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state is performed on the information display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process). In the case where the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on)
According to this feature, the information display unit that performs variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is informed that it is in a set state. Notification can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22) ,
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can at least perform variable display. Part 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the opening sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started) Transition to a confirmation state (for example, a state where the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG.
When in the confirmation state, the information display unit performs display that can recognize the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation processing). In the case where the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on)
According to this feature, the information display unit that performs variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is informed that it is in a confirmation state. Notification can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 207SG,
The display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 and 8-27). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are displayed. Different part)
According to this characteristic, it is possible to accurately recognize that the game machine is in the set state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 4 of invention 207SG,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the variable display unit (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). Part that lights up all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this characteristic, suitable notification can be performed on the variable display section.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 5 of invention 207SG,
The variable display section is composed of a plurality of small display sections that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. Part),
As a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state, a display in which all the small display portions are turned on is performed (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is displayed). Part that lights up all the segments that make up)
According to this characteristic, it is possible to easily recognize that the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 6 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a game medium into a gaming area (for example, the left gaming area 207SG002L and the right gaming area 207SG002R) and plays a game,
The information display unit includes a firing direction notifying unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) for notifying the firing direction of the game medium in the gaming area,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the firing direction notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), (The part where the right-handed lamp 207SG132 blinks in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, a suitable notification can be performed in the launch direction notification unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 7 of invention 207SG,
A holding storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) capable of storing information relating to variable display as holding information,
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display unit 207SG025A and a second hold display unit 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage unit,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), (Part for blinking all segments constituting the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine having the above characteristics is described, and according to this characteristic, suitable notification can be performed in the hold display section.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 8 of invention 207SG,
A special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state in the advantageous state;
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round indicator 207SG131) that notifies the number of times that the special variable device enters the first state in the advantageous state,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that can recognize the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the number-of-times notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), (The part in which only one segment is lit among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform a suitable notification in the frequency notification unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 8 of invention 207SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game;
A detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on;
State information storage means (for example, the area of the address F002 in the RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, RAM clear flag) that can identify the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means;
With
The game control means includes
A first condition (for example, a state where the clear switch is ON) is established, including that the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state where the clear switch is ON). When the game information is being erased, an initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanying the erasure of the game information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 8-21 (A)) is performed. Is feasible,
A second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON, and the lock switch is in a state where the state of the gaming machine detected by the detecting means is a special state (for example, a state where the clear switch is ON)) 207SG051 and open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial process executed when the first condition is satisfied An initialization process common to the initialization process can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a part capable of executing a RAM clear process and a set value change process)
The state information is not erased regardless of which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process). Not part)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be made common when the first condition is established and when the second condition is established. While preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing, the initialization process based on the state information can be accurately executed.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 208SG. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that it cannot be suitably left that a predetermined error has occurred in the set state. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 208SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22) ,
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can at least perform variable display. Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated) Transition to a setting state in which settings can be made (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-22)
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, display that can specify that the predetermined error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (B)). In the case where an error more than the set value occurs, the part that makes all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B blink)
According to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in a variable display area where variable display, which is an important display in a gaming machine, is executed. Since it is notified by display, it is possible to suitably notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition is satisfied.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 208SG,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined error is an error relating to at least a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error of a set value or more). It is possible to suitably notify that an error relating to the storage area in which is stored occurs and the setting value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 208SG,
If a power interruption occurs before the new setting value changed in the setting state is confirmed, an error relating to the storage area in which the setting value is stored has occurred at the time of recovery from the power interruption. Even if not, a display that can specify that an error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, the first special symbol even in the case of returning from the power interruption during the setting change as shown in FIG. 287 (B)). (Part for blinking all segments constituting the display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, it is necessary to reset the set value because a power failure occurred before the set value was confirmed without providing a new error. This can be suitably reported.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 209SG. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with information display means capable of displaying predetermined information related to a given game value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and information display means for confirming the set value However, there is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in the means 1 of the invention 209SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be played using game media and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22) ,
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a big winning opening, etc. The part where the prize ball is paid out)
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and the predetermined information (for example, the base shown in FIG. Value) information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029),
With
The information display means can display setting value information that can specify the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, a pachinko game). If the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state)
The number of the display units used is different between the case where the predetermined information is displayed and the case where the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029). When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (The part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, the setting value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information relating to the gaming value. Therefore, a display means for displaying the setting value information is provided. There is no need to provide it separately, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information that can specify that an error relating to at least the storage area in which the setting value is stored has occurred (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), In the case where a set value abnormality error has occurred, “E.” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D).
The number of the display units used is the same when the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed (for example, FIG. 8-25 (A) and FIG. 8-26 (B)). As shown in FIG. 5, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display are both displayed when the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 and when an abnormal error is displayed. Part using part 207SG029D)
According to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error relating to the storage area in which the setting value is stored has occurred, and the error information is different from the setting value information. Can be easily recognized.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 209SG,
The display unit includes a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, each of the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D is 8). Segment)),
It has a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
If the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means satisfies an initialization condition (for example, that the clear switch is ON), the information display means is configured to display the small information that constitutes each display unit. All the display units are lit up and turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, the fourth display unit). 207SG029D All the segments that make up and turn off all parts (flashing part))
According to this feature, it can be confirmed whether or not all of the small display portions are normal.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 4 of invention 209SG,
It has a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection unit satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display unit displays the set value information without being in the full lighting display state (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-22, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed, and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, the set value can be quickly confirmed.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 210SG. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine that executes a confirmation operation of a movable body based on a setting value changing operation, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349, if the confirmation operation of the movable body is executed while the set value is being changed, the operator may miss the confirmation operation. Therefore, it is conceivable that the confirmation operation is executed again after the setting value changing operation is completed. In this case, when the setting value changing operation is completed during the first movable body checking operation, the changing operation is terminated. Thus, there is a problem that a new movable body check operation is started from the timing, and the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine according to means 1 of invention 210SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Movable bodies (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be operable;
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, the portion where the production control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22) ,
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
When a specific condition is satisfied, the setting means shifts to a setting state in which a setting value can be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, a clear switch, a lock switch, 207SG051 and the opening sensor 207SG090 are each ON, the part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process),
The control means includes
When the confirmation operation control (for example, actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can normally operate is shifted to the setting state, and (E.g., as shown in FIG. 8-35, when the presentation control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command, the actual control is executed. Actual operation from the timing at which the first movable body initialization process including the operation check operation control and the second movable body initialization process are sequentially executed, and the setting value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. A part for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the confirmation operation control),
If the setting state ends when the movable body is performing a confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when transitioning to the setting state, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the setting state is not executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command and the set value check start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (Part in which the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Movable bodies (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be operable;
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, the portion where the production control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22) ,
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, clearing is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The part in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation process when the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the opening sensor 207SG090 are ON),
The control means includes
Confirmation operation control (for example, a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed. , And can be executed when the confirmation state ends and when the confirmation state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-35, the production control CPU 120 performs a set value change start notification command or a set value confirmation). A part for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing at which the start notification command is received, the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation A part for sequentially executing the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation check operation control from the timing of receiving the end notification command),
If the confirmation state ends when the movable body is performing a confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the confirmation state is shifted to, the confirmation operation control based on the completion of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command and the set value check start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command. (Part in which the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 210SG,
The control means includes
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, a return operation control (for example, non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed as the confirmation operation. Can be executed before executing the control,
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation is completed (for example, a first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process). The part that executes the actual operation check operation control after ending the non-detection self-operation control)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 4 of invention 210SG,
The control means includes
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the setting state or the confirmation state is terminated when the operation state of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), the first control is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value check start notification command). When a set value change end notification command or a set value check end notification command is received during the body initialization process, a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body is newly executed after the second movable body initialization process is executed. On the other hand, when the operation state of the confirmation operation does not satisfy a predetermined condition, confirmation operation control is executed when the setting state or the confirmation state ends. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (B), the first movable body initialization process based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command is terminated. If a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization process, a new first movable body initialization process and a second change are made after the second movable body initialization process is completed. (The part which executes 2 movable body initialization processing in order)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation state of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to means 5 of invention 210SG,
Comprising a plurality of the movable bodies,
The control means includes
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a portion in which the production control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first face transmission initialization process and the second movable body initialization process),
If the setting state or the confirmation state ends when the confirmation operation has not been completed for all of the movable bodies, the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has been completed satisfies a predetermined condition. The confirmation operation control due to the completion of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 performs a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command). When the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of the first movable body initialization process, the first new On the other hand, when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the set state or the second movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process is not performed. Confirmation operation control based on completion of the confirmation state is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-35 (B), the production control CPU 120 performs a set value change start notification command or a set value confirmation). When the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of the start notification command is completed and the setting value change notification command or the setting value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization process, (2) The first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly executed in order after the completion of the movable body initialization process.
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation state of the confirmation operation.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention can be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

  For example, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200 is replaced with a first special symbol display device 207SG004A, a second special symbol display device 207SG004B, a first hold indicator 207SG025A, a second hold indicator 207SG025B, Although the example comprised from the symbol display 207SG020, the universal figure hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time-shortening lamp 207SG134 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The game information display unit 207SG200 may include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

  In the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process (setting value changing state) and the case where the setting value checking process is being executed (setting value checking state). Although the example which makes 1 special symbol display apparatus 207SG004A and 2nd special symbol display apparatus 207SG004B light in the same aspect was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, CPU103 is performing setting value change processing The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different manners depending on whether or not the setting value confirmation process is being performed. By doing in this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by the lighting mode or the flashing mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It is possible to inform easily whether there is.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on by lighting all the segments. The display mode (lighting mode) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lights up) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state. Aspect) is the first special symbol display device 207S. If the 004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is different from the display mode in the case where the variable display result is derived and displayed, out of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B Some segments need not be lit.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all segments and the round display unit 207SG131 that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. Illustrated is a mode in which one segment is turned on, all the segments constituting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are flashed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, the lighting of one segment constituting the round indicator 207SG131, the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are configured. Of all segments The dark, not executed, or may be executed only partially.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the above embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is lit. Is not limited to this, and if the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 8-6, the number of lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state is plural. There may be.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is performed using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is illustrated. For example, an error notification LED may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 individually, and the LED may be lit or blinked to notify that a set value abnormality error has occurred.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 207SG of the said embodiment, although the form provided with the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying a base value on the pachinko game machine 1 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The pachinko game The machine 1 may not include the display monitor 207SG029. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 as described above, a display means for displaying the set value (or provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided. .

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, when the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body Depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed, a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is performed. Although an example of determining whether to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process, It may be determined according to the operating distance of each movable body or the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, Although the round indicator 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like are illustrated in a mode different from that during the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is informed of the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state. Is not limited to this, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the round display that constitute the game information display unit 207SG200. Vessel 2 7SG0131, the like right-handed lamp 207SG132, may have a structure in which pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in the notification if during the game that the setting value is changed status and settings confirmation state (lit or flashing).

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, Although the round indicator 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like are illustrated in a mode different from that in the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is informed of the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state. Is not limited to this, and the “mode different from that during the game” may include that the blinking cycle is different, the luminance, the emission color of each segment is different, and the like.

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization are performed from when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command. As an example of the process, the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start notification. From the time when the command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received, the non-detection operation control of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. The actual operation check operation control of each movable body may be executed.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, Although the round indicator 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are turned on or blinked to illustrate that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the present invention is limited to this. 1st special symbol display device 207SG004A, second special symbol display device 207SG004B, first hold indicator 207SG025A, second hold indicator when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or set value confirmation state 207SG025B, Lau De indicator 207SG131, may be provided with written description of the lighting or blinking of the right-handed light 207SG132 is executed at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (e.g., the vicinity of the gaming information display unit 207SG200). By doing in this way, a store clerk or the like who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold. It can be prevented that the lighting or blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, or the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is mistaken as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like.

  In the game control main process of the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. The mode of executing the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) after clearing the flag is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM clear process If it is determined in 207SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (20 SGSa014; Y) to be executed.

(Explanation regarding feature 019SG)
Next, an embodiment related to the feature unit 019SG will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 019SG, and FIG. 9-2 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the first image display device 019SG005A and the second image display device 019SG005B.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 019SG is provided with a first image display device 019SG005A in place of the image display device 5 near the center of the game area in the game board 2, A second image display device 019SG005B having a size smaller than that of the first image display device 019SG005A is provided below the first image display device 019SG005A.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9 (B), the second image display device 019SG005B has a small retraction position in a region overlapping with the first image display device 019SG005A, and the second image display device 019SG005B rises. It is possible to move between the advance position where the area overlapping with the one image display device 019SG005A becomes larger. The second image display device 019SG005B is normally located at the retracted position shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), but in a specific situation, it moves to the advanced position shown in FIG. 9-2 (B). . Although not specifically shown, the second image display device 019SG005B moves from the retreat position to the advance position at a predetermined timing during the game such as the start timing of a specific reach effect or the start timing of a big hit game. The stage is moved from the advance position to the retreat position at the end timing of the performance or the end timing of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, a first reserved storage display area 019SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 019SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right sides of the display area of the second image display device 019SG005B. In the first hold memory display area 019SG005D and the second hold memory display area 019SG005U, hold display is performed to display the variable display hold memory number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game in an identifiable manner. In addition, an active display area 019SG005P for displaying the hold display corresponding to the hold storage during the variable display as the active display is displayed at the center in the left-right direction below the second image display device 019SG005B.

  Here, the suspension of variable display corresponding to the special game is such that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B. ) Is generated based on the starting prize. That is, a start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols is established, but a variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. In the present embodiment, the hold display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening is a round white display, and the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening ( The hold display generated based on the start winning due to the entry) is similarly a round white display. In addition, the active display area 019SG005P in the present embodiment has a form in which a round white display having a larger display area than each hold display is surrounded by a square. As described above, the active display area 019SG005P in the present embodiment is displayed at the center of the left and right direction at the lower part of the second image display device 019SG005B, and is different from each hold display. Even the visibility from the player is high. That is, the visibility in the present embodiment indicates the ease of recognition by the line of sight from the player. For this reason, the active display area 019SG005P has a mode different from the hold display as in the present embodiment, is displayed at a position that is easier to be visually recognized by the player than the hold display, and is brighter than the hold display. May be included.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 019SG can be operated by a player specifying the upper, lower, left, and right at predetermined positions on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. A cross key 019SG300 is provided. The cross key 019SG300 is connected to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 can detect the operation of the cross key 019SG300.

  Next, an effect control command output from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 9-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the variable display start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the variable display start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first image display device 019SG005A corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variable display time) such as a decorative pattern. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), a determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. ) And different EXT data are set in accordance with a determination result (a jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of jackpot types when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit B”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C”. The command 8C04H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating variable display stop (determination) of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first image display device 019SG005A. is there. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time shortening control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is performed by the time shortening control. On the other hand, a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, short time state) in which probability variation control is not performed is used. In addition, the command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (high probability low base state, timeless probability variation state) in which probability variation control is performed while time variation control is not performed, and command 9503H is probability variation and time variation control. It is assumed that the fourth gaming state designation command corresponds to the gaming state in which the control is performed together (highly accurate high base state, time-varying probability changing state).

  The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big prize opening notifying that it is a period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  In the jackpot start designation command or jackpot end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result designation command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command or jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. The second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established.

  The command B5XXH is an effect control command for notifying the remaining number of time reductions (variable display number), and by setting EXT data corresponding to the remaining number of time reductions (variable display number), The remaining number of times (variable display number) is notified.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first reserved memory display area 019SG005D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the second reserved memory display area 81SG5U or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the first starting condition is satisfied by passing (entering) the game ball through the first starting winning opening. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved memory number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern The numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal display result and the random value MR5 for determining the MR4 initial value are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, for example, a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and updates various numerical data by software, so that one of the random values MR1 to MR5. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit gaming state as a big hit or not This is a random value to be used. For example, it takes a value in the range of “0” to “65535”, and is added one by one every game control timer interrupt processing (about every 0.002 seconds). The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is a random value used to determine the big hit type as “big hit A”, “big hit B”, or “big hit C” when the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “0” to “299”, and is incremented by 1 for each game control timer interrupt process (about every 0.002 seconds).

  The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ 997 "is taken, and is added one by one in the game control timer interrupt process once (approximately every 0.002 seconds) and the remaining time of the interrupt process, that is, the game control main process.

  The random number MR4 for determining the general-purpose display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual”. For example, the value is in the range of “3” to “23”, and is added one by one for each game control timer interrupt process (about every 0.002 seconds).

  The random value MR5 for determining the MR4 initial value is a random value used for determining the initial value of the random value MR4 when the random number MR4 for determining the normal display result makes a round. For example, “3” to “3” It takes a value in the range of “23” and is incremented by one in each game control timer interrupt process (approximately every 0.002 seconds) and the remaining time of the interrupt process, that is, in the game control main process.

  FIG. 9-5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “out of”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, Corresponding to the case where the display result is “big hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach out-of-range variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach out of variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the deviation fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  For the big hit fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern, the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is executed, the super reach change pattern in which the super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed, and the pseudo-ream effect ( 1 time) → Super reach α, pseudo-continuous production (2 times) → Super reach α, pseudo-continuous production (3 times) → Super reach β, pseudo-continuous production (1 time) → Super reach β, pseudo-continuous production (2 times) ) → Super Reach β, Pseudo Continuous Production (3 times) → Super Reach β There is a pseudo continuous super reach variation pattern in which a reach production that develops from a pseudo continuous production to a super reach is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. In addition to the super reach α and super reach β, three or more super reach variation patterns and pseudo continuous super reach patterns such as super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5, regarding the special map variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is executed in the present embodiment, the super reach change pattern in which the super reach reach effect is executed, → It is set shorter than the pseudo-ream super-reach pattern in which the reach production of super reach is executed. In addition, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach variation pattern in the present embodiment, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed is the change pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed. The special figure variable display time is set longer than that. Further, the special figure variable display time of the quasi-continuous super reach pattern in the present embodiment is set longer than the super reach variation pattern because the pseudo continuous effect is executed. In addition, as for the special figure variable display time of the pseudo-continuous super reach variation pattern in the present embodiment, the special figure variable display time is set longer as the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, pseudo-continuous production (3 times) → super reach β, pseudo-continuous production (2 times) → super reach β, pseudo-continuous production (1 time) → super reach β, pseudo-continuous production (3 times) ) → Super Reach α, Pseudo-continuous production (twice) → Super Reach α, Pseudo-continuous production (once) → Super reach α, Super reach β, Super reach α, Normal reach variable display result is “big hit” Therefore, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the big hit expectation is higher as the variable display time is longer. That is, with regard to the reach variation pattern, the pseudo-continuous production (3 times) → super reach β has the highest jackpot expectation level, and normal reach has the lowest jackpot expectation level.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the variation pattern type is determined in advance, for example, the non-reach type, the normal reach type, the super reach type, etc. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variation pattern types. The variation to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after first determining the variation pattern type from the random value of Turn may be determined.

  FIG. 9-6 illustrates a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

  The display result determination table is determined as a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a big hit gaming state as a big hit gaming state, or whether or not the small hit is set as a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table that is referred to in order to make a decision based on

  In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, a special figure is displayed depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state (low accuracy state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for result determination is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out”.

  In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result for controlling the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”, the special figure display result Is the determination data assigned to the determination result of “small hit” and the determination result of “special figure display result” of “off”. In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are “big hit” than when the game state is the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). Assigned to the special map display result. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the short time state (low probability state), the special figure display result is controlled as the big hit gaming state. Then, compared to the determined probability (about 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “big hit” and controlling the big hit gaming state is higher (about 1 in the present embodiment). / 30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state compared to the normal state or the short time state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state so as to increase.

  FIG. 9-7 illustrates a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the big hit game state, the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (fluctuated) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol) Depending on whether it is a special game by the symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is “big hit A”, “big hit B”, “big hit C”, etc. It is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types.

  Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9-8 (B). In the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the short-time control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The big hit A and the big hit C, which are shifted to the high-accuracy and high-base state by executing the high-precision control and the time-shortening control after the big hit gaming state is finished, are set.

  In the big hit gaming state with “hit A”, as described above, the round that changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed five times (so-called five rounds), which is repeatedly executed for a short-term open big hit. It is. Also, in the big hit gaming state with “big hit B”, as described above, the round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Open jackpot. Further, in the big hit gaming state with “big hit C”, as described above, the round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is fifteen times (so-called 15 rounds), which is repeated for a long time. Open jackpot. Therefore, “big hit A” may be called 5 round (5R) big hit, “big hit B” may be called 10 round (10R) big hit, and “big hit C” may be called 15 round (10R) big hit.

  The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C is continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big hit gaming state ends. Therefore, when the big hit that is generated again is the big hit B or big hit C, since the high-accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit gaming state is continuously performed without going through the normal state. The so-called villa state occurs.

  On the other hand, the time-shortening control that is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state by “big hit A” is that a special number game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) or the predetermined number of special figure games. Ends by entering the big hit gaming state before is executed.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9-7, “hit B” and “hit C” depending on whether the special figure for executing variable display is the first special figure or the second special figure. The judgment value allocation to the jackpot type is different. That is, when the special figure for executing the variable display is the first special figure, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of “100” to “249”) Is assigned to the big hit type of “big hit B” with a small number of rounds, while the special figure for executing variable display is the second special figure, as shown in FIG. A determination value in a smaller range (a value in the range of “100” to “199”) is assigned to the big hit type of “big hit B” with a small number of rounds. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the ratio of determining the big hit type as “big hit B” with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the probability of determining that the big hit type is “big hit B” and controlling the normal open big hit state with a small number of rounds is low. In a gaming state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of the game is prevented from deteriorating by avoiding frequent occurrence of the normally open big hit state with few prize balls obtained. It can be done.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9-7, the assignment of the decision value to the big hit type of “big hit A” is whether the special figure for executing variable display is the first special figure or the second special figure. The probability of jackpot A and the probability of probability variation jackpot is whether the special chart for executing variable display is the first special chart or the second special chart. Regardless, it is the same.

  Therefore, as described above, according to the fact that the assignment of the judgment value to “big hit B” differs depending on whether the special figure for executing variable display is the first special figure or the second special figure, The allocation of the judgment value for “big hit C” also differs depending on whether the special figure for executing variable display is the first special figure or the second special figure. The special figure to be executed is set to be more easily determined when it is the second special figure than when it is the first special figure.

  Even when the special figure for executing variable display is the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the special figure for executing variable display is the first special figure is “big hit B”. You may make it allocate to a big hit type. For example, when the special figure for executing variable display is the second special figure, the determination value is smaller than that for the case where the special figure for executing variable display is the first special figure, and the big hit type of “big hit B” May be assigned. Alternatively, regardless of whether the special figure for executing variable display is the first special figure or the second special figure, the big hit type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the special figure display result is “big hit”, and the special figure display result is “small hit”. A variation pattern determination table for small hits used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for deviation used when it is determined in advance that the special figure display result is “out of” Are prepared in advance.

  The big hit variation pattern judgment table includes the big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B / C) used when the big hit type is “big hit B” and “big hit C”, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. The big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit A) is prepared in advance, and these big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B / C) and big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit A) ) Includes a fluctuation pattern per normal reach big hit (PB1-1), a fluctuation pattern per super reach α big hit (PB1-2), a pseudo-continuous effect (once) → a fluctuation pattern per super reach α big hit (PB1-3), pseudo Continuous production (2 times) → Super reach α big change pattern (PB1-4), pseudo-continuous production (3 times) → Super reach α big hit Fluctuation pattern (PB1-5), fluctuation pattern per super reach β big hit (PB1-6), pseudo-continuous effect (1 time) → fluctuation pattern per super reach β big hit (PB1-7), pseudo continuous effect (twice) → Change pattern (PB1-8) per super reach β big hit, pseudo-continuous production (3 times) → Random value MR3 for change pattern judgment for each change pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-9) In the range that can be taken, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B / C) is used, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A) is used. In this case, determination values are assigned to the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B / C) and the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A) so that the super reach α is easily determined. When the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that it will be “big hit B” or “big hit C”.

  Also, when the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B / C) is used, super reach with pseudo-continuous effects is easily determined, and when the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A) is used In order to easily determine a super reach without pseudo-continuous effects, determination values are assigned to the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B / C) and the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A). Thus, when a super reach variation pattern with a pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that it will be “big hit B” or “big hit C”.

  Further, the deviation variation pattern determination table is used when the number of reserved storage patterns is 1 or less, and when the total number of reserved storage is 2 to 4 is used. Outlier variation pattern determination table B, outlier variation pattern determination table C used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8, and when the gaming state is a high base state in which time-shortening control is performed A deviation variation pattern determination table D used for the above is prepared in advance.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table A, the non-reach variation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, the normal reach variation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α variation variation pattern (PA2-2), pseudo Continuous production (1 time) → Super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), pseudo-continuous production (2 times) → Super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), pseudo-continuous production (3 times) → Super Reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-5), Super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-6), pseudo-continuous effect (once) → Super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-7), pseudo-continuous effect ( 2 times) → Super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-8), pseudo-continuous production (3 times) → Super reach β deviation variation pattern (3 times) PA2-9) is assigned a predetermined random value as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach shift variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the number of reserved storages for executing special display being three, normal reach shift variation Pattern (PA2-1), Superreach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), pseudo-continuous production (1 time) → Superreach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), pseudo-continuous production (2 times) → Super Reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), pseudo-continuous production (3 times) → Super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-5), Super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-6), pseudo-continuous production ( 1 time) → Super reach β shift pattern (PA2-7), pseudo-continuous production (2 times) → Super reach β shift pattern (PA2-7) ), Pseudo-continuous production (3 times) → a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-9) out of super reach β Yes. Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for deviation, the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-3) and normal reach variation corresponding to the fact that the number of reserved memories for executing variable display is four. Pattern (PA2-1), Superreach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), pseudo-continuous production (1 time) → Superreach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), pseudo-continuous production (2 times) → Super Reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), pseudo-continuous production (3 times) → Super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-5), Super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-6), pseudo-continuous production ( 1 time) → Super reach β shift pattern (PA2-7), pseudo-continuous production (2 times) → Super reach β shift pattern (PA2-7) ), Pseudo-continuous production (3 times) → a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-9) out of super reach β Yes. Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control. (PA2-2), Pseudo-continuous production (1 time) → Super reach α shift variation pattern (PA2-3), Pseudo continuous production (2 times) → Super reach α shift variation pattern (PA2-4), Production (3 times) → Super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-5), Super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-6), Pseudo-continuous production (1 time) → Super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2−) 7) Pseudo-continuous production (twice) → Super reach β variation pattern (PA2-8), Pseudo-continuous production (three times) → Super reach β A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to the out-of-range variation pattern (PA2-9) in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5, the variable display time is shorter for the non-reach shift variation pattern (PA1-2) than the non-reach shift variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. The non-reach shift pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter variable display time than the pattern (PA1-2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach deviation variation pattern with a short variable display time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. When the start prize is received, it becomes difficult to generate useless start prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories decreases, the variable display time is long and the non-reach is not shortened. By determining the variation pattern (PA1-1), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed by increasing the variable display time.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure hold storage unit, a second special figure hold storage unit, a general figure hold storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit is a special figure that has not yet started even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. Hold data of a game (a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit establishes the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball in association with the hold number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening. The random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 as the hold data This is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) To hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to win a big hit.

  The second special figure holding storage unit has a start prize (second start prize) that has not yet started even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start prize port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B. The holding data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit establishes the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball in association with the hold number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening. The random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 as the hold data , Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) To hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to win a big hit.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the passing of the game ball through (entering) the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passed (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The usual figure hold storage unit stores hold information of a usual figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display unit 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general-purpose hold storage unit is used to determine the general-purpose display result determined by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the passage of the game balls in association with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41. Is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so as to be updatable by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 are stored as random count values, and are periodically updated according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by applying predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing to all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 in the present embodiment, for example, effect control data as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. A holding area 019SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 019SG190 shown in FIG. 9-9A includes an effect control flag setting unit 019SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 019SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 019SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 019SG194. I have.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 019SG191, for example, the state can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the screen of the first image display device 019SG005A, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A plurality of types of flags are provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 81SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 81SG192 includes, for example, a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screens of the first image display device 019SG005A and the second image display device 019SG005B. Is provided. For example, the production control timer setting unit 019SG192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 019SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 019SG193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 019SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 019SG194 stores data indicating the buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 019SG194A as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 019SG194. The reception command buffer 019SG194A at the time of a start winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved memory number of the first special figure reserved memory. Storage area corresponding to the maximum number (for example, “4”) of the total reserved memory number of the second special figure reserved memory (area corresponding to the buffer numbers “2-1” to “2-4”) And are provided. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), the effect control buffer setting unit 019SG194 is provided with one storage area corresponding to the active display area, and the status at the time of winning the variable display being executed Is stored in the active display buffer 019SG194B. When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first start opening winning designation command or second start opening winning designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command ( Two commands of the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation memory in the reception command buffer 019SG194A and the active display buffer 019SG194B at the start winning prize, the start opening prize designation command, the notification of the number of reserved memories A storage area (entry) for associating and storing the commands separately in the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory is secured.

  The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one as will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest-order hold storage (buffer number “1”) is started. To go.

  Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 019SG194A and the active display buffer 019SG194B according to the present embodiment, whether or not it is an effect target of an active display change effect to be described later and a final display mode (effect type) of the active display are displayed. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that the display target flag shown can be stored in association with each buffer number.

  The display target flag stores one of values “0” to “5”, and when the execution of the active display change effect is not determined (the target of the active display change effect). “0” is stored in the case of not being determined), and “1” to “5” are stored in the case where execution of the hold display notice effect is determined. When “0” is stored in the display target flag, the hold display notice effect is not executed and the active display is “white”. When “1” is stored in the display target flag, the active display is final. When “2” is stored in the display target flag, the active display finally becomes “green”, and when “3” is stored in the display target flag, the active display is final. When “4” is stored in the display target flag, the active display finally becomes “golden”, and when “5” is stored in the display target flag, the active display is final. It becomes "rainbow color".

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the head (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry of the start winning reception command buffer 019SG194A at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port. . At the time of start winning, a start opening winning designation command and a pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if command reception is performed, if the command reception is based on the start winning to the first start winning opening, the buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4” corresponding to the special figure reservation storage are stored. If the start opening prize designation command and the hold memory number notification command are stored in the corresponding storage areas in order, and if the command reception is based on the start winning to the second start winning opening, the special figure hold storage Are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “2-1” to “2-4” corresponding to each in the order of the start opening winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command.

  In the present embodiment, when variable display based on the first special figure hold storage is executed, the buffer number “1-1” of the start winning reception command buffer 019SG194A is displayed when variable display of decorative symbols is started. Is copied to the entry of the active display buffer 019SG194B, and the stored content of the entry of the buffer number “1-1” in the start winning reception command buffer 019SG194A is deleted, and the buffer number “1-2” and subsequent ones are deleted. The stored content of the entry is shifted to the entry one higher.

  In addition, when variable display based on the second special figure hold memory is executed, the contents of the entry of the buffer number “2-1” in the start winning reception command buffer 019SG194A when the decorative symbol variable display is started Is copied to the entry of the active display buffer 019SG194B, the stored content of the entry of the buffer number “2-1” in the start winning reception command buffer 019SG194A is deleted, and the stored content of the entries after the buffer number “2-2” Are shifted to the next higher entry.

  In the present embodiment, the active display area 019SG005P can be changed in a display mode based on the value of the display mode flag stored in each entry of the start winning reception command buffer 019SG194A. The data stored in the active display buffer 019SG194B is deleted each time the decorative symbol variable display is completed.

  Next, an example of command analysis processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in S75 of FIG. 6 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 9-10.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is a received command from the main board 11 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer (019 SGS 221). At this time, if there is no received command, the command analysis processing is terminated.

  If there is a reception command at 019SGS221, for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is a first start opening prize designation command (019SGS222). If it is the first start opening winning designation command, the process proceeds to 019SGS233.

  If the received command is not the first start opening prize designation command in 019SGS222, it is determined whether or not the received command is the second start opening prize designation command (019SGS224). If it is the second start opening winning designation command, the process proceeds to 019SGS233.

  If the received command is not the second start opening prize designation command in 019SGS224, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first reserved memory number notification command (019SGS228). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command, for example, the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer provided in the RAM 122 or the like (019 SGS229). Then, “0” is set to the display mode flag of the storage area (entry) in which the first pending storage number notification command is stored (019SGS232).

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in 019SGS228, it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (019SGS230). When the command is the second reserved memory count notification command, for example, by initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer, the second reserved memory count notification waiting time is cleared (019 SGS231), and the second reserved memory count notification is issued. The display mode flag of the storage area (entry) in which the command is stored is set to “0” (019SGS232), and the process proceeds to 019SGS233.

  In 019 SGS 233, the received command is stored in the start winning reception command buffer provided in the RAM 122 or the like, and the process proceeds to 019 SGS 221.

  On the other hand, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in 019SGS230, the setting corresponding to the received command is performed (019SGS234), and the process proceeds to 019SGS221.

  Next, the production control process in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 9-11, in the effect control process of the present embodiment, after executing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161), the first reserved storage display area 019SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 019SG005U, and A hold display / active display update process for updating the display mode of the active display area 019SG005P is performed (019SGS162), and then the processes of S170 to S177 are performed according to the value of the effect process flag, and the effect control process process is terminated. To do.

  FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing according to the present embodiment. In the variable display start process shown in FIG. 9-12, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (019SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the contents of the entry of the buffer number “1-1” in the start winning reception command buffer 019SG194A are copied (updated) to the active display buffer 019SG194B (019SGS272). The command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4” of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 019SG194A are stored for one buffer number. It shifts to the upper level one by one (019SGS273). Note that the contents of the buffer number “1-1” are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift.

  If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (019 SGS274). When the second variable display start command reception flag is set, the contents of the entry of the buffer number “2-1” in the start winning reception command buffer 019SG194A are copied (updated) to the active display buffer 019SG194B (019SGS275). The command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers “2-1” to “2-4” in the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 019SG194A are stored for one buffer number. Shifts upward by one (019 SGS276). Note that the contents of the buffer number “2-1” are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift.

  If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process is terminated.

  After execution of 019SGS273 or 019SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads a variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (019SGS277).

  Next, the display result of the decorative symbol (stop symbol) is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) (019SGS278). In this case, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

  In the present embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot C, the effect control CPU 120, for example, displays “7” as the three symbols as the stop symbol. The combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) arranged in is determined. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than “7” (for example, “111”, “ 333 ”,“ 555 ”,“ 999 ”, etc.). In the case where the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, a combination of decorative symbols in which 3 symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the jackpot symbol. When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 is set in advance as a stop symbol, for example. The combination (decoration pattern) of the decoration pattern that becomes the combination (for example, the decoration pattern combination such as “135”) is determined. Further, in the case of the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, a combination of decorative symbols (losing symbols) in which three symbols other than the small hit symbol are irregular as the stop symbols is determined.

  In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted, and data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, it is sufficient to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an active display change effect determining process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for changing the display mode of the active display area 019SG005P during the variable display and an effect type (019SGS279). ), It is determined whether or not to execute the active display change effect (019SGS280), and when it is determined to execute the active display change effect, the active display change effect is displayed in the active display change effect start waiting timer. A value corresponding to the time until the production starts is set (019SGS281), and the process proceeds to 019SGS282. On the other hand, if it is not determined to execute the active display change effect, the process proceeds to 019SGS282 without going through 019SGS281.

  In 019SG282, the CPU 120 for effect control selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern designation command). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (019SG283).

  The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the first image display device 019SG005A and the second image display device 019SG005B, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the control unit, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. correspond to each process data n (No. 1 to N) In addition, they are arranged in chronological order.

  Next, the production control CPU 120 performs the production device (first production parts as production parts) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the image display device 019SG005A and the second image display device 019SG005B, various lamps as effect parts and speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (019SGS284). ). For example, the first image display device 019SG005A outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern designation command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (019SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (019 SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 is written to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the first image display device 019SG005A, and the first image display device 019SG005A displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decorative design. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (S172) (019SGS287).

  Next, an example of the active display change effect determination process performed in the variable display start setting process will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 9-13.

  In the active display change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (019SGS301). The variable display result can be specified by a variable display result designation command. The variation pattern can be specified by a variation pattern designation command. In this embodiment, the target of the active display change effect is super reach. Specifically, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit is specified by the variable display result designation command, and the variation pattern is super. It is only necessary to specify whether or not it is a reach using a variation pattern designation command.

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern specified in 019SGS301 is super reach (019SGS302). If the variation pattern is not superreach, the active display change effect is terminated, and the variation pattern is superreach. Confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified in 019SGS301 is a variation pattern with pseudo-continuity (019SGS303).

  If the variation pattern is a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations in 019SGS303, it is determined to change the display mode of the active display by executing the first active display change effect (019SGS304). As shown in FIG. 9-14, the first active display change effect is the second image display device 019SG005B every time a decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variable (revariable display) is executed as a pseudo-continuous effect. A roulette effect that suggests the opening / closing of the shutter image (display / non-display of the shutter image) and the change stage of the display mode of the active display is executed, and a series of effects that finally execute the action effect that acts on the active display area 019SG005P Point to. The active display changes to the final display mode in response to the action effect being executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display using the active display mode determination table (for the first active display change effect) stored in the RAM 122 (019SGS304), and proceeds to 019SGS306.

  Specifically, when the variation pattern specified in 019SGS301 is a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), if the variable display result is a big hit, the active display The final display mode is determined to be blue at a rate of 10%, green at a rate of 25%, red at a rate of 55%, gold at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 5% Determined to be iridescent (rainbow pattern). If the variable display result is lost, the final display mode of active display is determined to be blue at a rate of 50%, green is determined at a rate of 34%, red is determined at a rate of 15%, and 1% The ratio is determined to be gold, and the ratio is determined to be iridescent (rainbow pattern) at a ratio of 0%.

  When the variation pattern specified in 019SGS301 is a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous production is executed twice, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), if the variable display result is a big hit, the final display mode of the active display is changed. Blue is determined at a rate of 0%, green is determined at a rate of 30%, red is determined at a rate of 60%, gold is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rainbow color (rainbow pattern is determined at a rate of 5% ). If the variable display result is lost, the final display mode of active display is determined to be blue at a rate of 0%, green is determined at a rate of 59%, red is determined at a rate of 40%, and 1% The ratio is determined to be gold, and the ratio is determined to be iridescent (rainbow pattern) at a ratio of 0%.

  If the variation pattern specified in 019SGS301 is a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (C), if the variable display result is a big hit, the final display mode of the active display is changed. Blue is determined at a rate of 0%, green is determined at a rate of 0%, red is determined at a rate of 70%, gold is determined at a rate of 15%, and a rainbow color (rainbow pattern is determined at a rate of 15% ). If the variable display result is lost, the final display mode of active display is determined to be blue at a rate of 0%, green is determined at a rate of 0%, red is determined at a rate of 97%, and 3% The ratio is determined to be gold, and the ratio is determined to be iridescent (rainbow pattern) at a ratio of 0%.

  As described above, in the feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment, when the active display change effect is executed, the big hit expectation that the variable display result is the big hit is the lowest when the active display finally becomes blue. The expected degree of jackpot increases in the order of green, red, gold, and iridescent. In particular, since the rainbow color appears only when the variable display result is a big hit, if the active display finally changes to a rainbow color, the variable display result will always be a big hit.

  In 019 SGS 306, it is confirmed whether the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect according to the variation pattern specified in 019 SGS 301 is one. If the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect is 1, the roulette effect is executed once. (019SGS307). In 019SGS306, if the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect is not one time, it is confirmed whether the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect is two times (019SGS308). The number of executions is determined to be 2 (019SGS309). If the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect is not two in 019SGS308, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect is three, so the number of executions of the roulette effect is determined to be three (019SGS310).

  Then, according to the number of executions of the roulette effect determined in 019SGS307, 019SGS309, and 019SGS310, a change stage of active display to be notified in each roulette effect (display mode via the final display mode) is determined (019SGS311). The active display change effect determination process is terminated.

  In the process of 019SGS311, as shown in FIG. 9-16, when the number of executions of the roulette effect is one (when the variation pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect once is selected), the first time The display mode of the active display notified by the roulette effect is determined as the final display mode determined in 019SGS304.

  When the number of executions of the roulette effect is two times (when the variation pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect twice is selected), the display mode of the active display to be notified in the second roulette effect is determined in 019SGS304. The final display mode is determined, and the display mode of the active display to be notified in the first roulette effect is determined to be a display mode having a lower jackpot expectation than the final display mode determined in 019SGS304.

  When the number of executions of the roulette effect is 3 times (when the variation pattern for executing the pseudo continuous effect 3 times is selected), the display mode of the active display to be notified by the third roulette effect is displayed at 019SGS304. The determined final display mode is determined, and the display mode of the active display that is notified in the second roulette effect is determined to be a display mode having a lower jackpot expectation than the final display mode determined in 019SGS304. The display mode of the active display to be notified is determined to be a display mode having a lower jackpot expectation than the display mode of the active display to be notified in the second roulette effect.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern is not a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations in 019 SGS 303, it is determined that the second active display change effect including only the effect effect is executed to change the display mode of the active display (019 SGS 312). The active display changes to the final display mode in response to the action effect being executed.

  Furthermore, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the final display mode of the active display using the active display mode determination table (for the second active display change effect) (see FIG. 9-17) stored in the ROM 122 (019SGS313). The active display change effect determination process is terminated.

  In addition, in 019SGS313, as shown in FIG. 9-17, if the variable display result is a big hit, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the final display mode of the active display to be blue at a rate of 10%, and at the rate of 30%. Green is determined, red is determined at a rate of 60%, gold is determined at a rate of 0%, and iridescent (rainbow pattern) is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is lost, the final display mode of the active display is determined to be blue at a rate of 60%, green is determined at a rate of 30%, red is determined at a rate of 10%, and 0% The ratio is determined to be gold, and the ratio is determined to be iridescent (rainbow pattern) at a ratio of 0%.

  As described above, in the feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-14 and 9-15, when variable display is executed with a variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed, Unlike the case where variable display is executed using a variation pattern for performing effects, the final display mode of active display is not determined to be gold or rainbow. In other words, when the first active display change effect is executed, the determination ratio of gold color or rainbow color, which is a mode with a high degree of expectation of jackpot, is set high as the active display final display mode.

  FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display effect process (step S172) in the effect control process. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer by 1 (step 019 SGS401, step 019 SGS402, step 019 SGS403). Further, the CPU 120 for effect control has an active display change effect start waiting timer set (determined to perform an active display change effect) or an active display change effect executing flag is set ( If the active display change effect is being executed (step 019SGS404; Y), the active display change effect process shown in FIG. 9-19 is executed (step 019SGS405). If neither the active display change effect start waiting timer nor the active display change effect execution flag is set, the process proceeds to step 019SGS406 without performing the active display change effect process of step 019SGS405.

  In step 019SGS406, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 019SGS407). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table in the process timer (step 019SGS408). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc., set next (step 019 SGS409). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the rendering device (for rendering) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) The control of the component is executed (step 019SGS410).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the post-operation for the push button is being executed (step 019SGS411). Whether or not the post-operation for the push button effect is being executed depends on whether or not the post-operation effect for the post-button effect execution set in the post-op-button effect post-execution execution process in step 019SGS422 described later is set. Can be identified. When the post-push button operation effect is being executed (step 019SGS411; Y), the process proceeds to the push button post-operation effect execution process in step 019SGS422.

  On the other hand, when the post-operation for the push button is not being executed (step 019SGS411; N), it is further determined whether or not the post-operation for the stick controller is being executed. Whether or not the post-operation effect for the stick controller is being executed depends on whether or not the post-operation effect execution flag for the stick controller that is set in the post-stick controller post-operation effect execution process in step 019SGS423 described later is set. Can be identified. If the post-operation effect for the stick controller is being executed (step 019SGS412; Y), the process proceeds to the post-stick controller operation effect execution process in step 019SGS423.

  If the post-operation for the stick controller is not being executed (step 019SGS412; N), it is determined whether or not the operation unit selection effect is being executed (step 019SGS413). Although details will be described later, during the super-reach reach effect in the feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment, the player operates the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A to notify the change display result (described later). Post-operation effects for push buttons and post-operation effects for stick controllers) can be executed, and the operation part selection effect is performed by the player to execute these post-operation effects for push buttons and post-operation effects for stick controllers. This is an effect for selecting an operation unit (push button 31B or stick controller 31A) to be operated by a player's operation.

  Whether or not the operation unit selection effect is being executed can be identified from the process data being executed, but the operation unit selection effect is being executed at the start timing of the operation unit selection effect as with the active display change effect. A flag may be set, and determination may be made based on whether or not the operation unit selection effect execution flag is set.

  If it is during the execution period of the operation part selection effect, the operation part selection effect execution process of step 019SGS414 is executed and then the process proceeds to step 019SGS415. If it is not during the execution period of the operation part selection effect, the process of step 019SGS414 is performed. It progresses to step 019SGS415, without going through an operation part selection production | presentation execution process. Therefore, the operation part selection effect execution process of step 019SGS414 is performed during the execution period of the operation part selection effect.

  In step 019 SGS 415, it is determined whether or not it is an operation reception start timing for the operation unit selected by the player. If it is an operation reception start timing for the operation unit selected by the player (step 019 SGS 415). ; Y), after starting the display of the operation promotion image according to the operation part selected by the player in the operation part selection effect execution process (019SGS414) (step 019SGS416), it progresses to step 019SGS424.

  On the other hand, if it is not the operation reception start timing (step 019SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not it is during the operation reception period. Whether or not it is during the operation acceptance period can be identified from the process data being executed. If it is not during the operation reception period (step 019SGS417; N), the process proceeds to step 019SGS424, and if it is during the operation reception period (step 019SGS417; Y), there is an operation on the operation unit selected by the player. Is determined (step 019SGS418).

  When there is an operation to the operation unit selected by the player (step 019SGS418; Y), the display of the operation promotion image started to be displayed in step 019SGS416 is terminated (step 019SGS420). On the other hand, if there is no operation on the operation unit selected by the player (step 019SGS418; N), it is further determined whether or not it is the operation reception end timing (step 019SGS419), and the operation reception end timing. If not (step 019SGS419; N), the process proceeds to step 019SGS424. If it is the timing for ending the operation reception (step 019SGS419; Y), the display of the operation promotion image started in step 019SGS416 is ended (step 019SGS420). That is, the display of the operation promotion image corresponding to the operation unit selected by the player is displayed until the operation is performed when there is an operation by the player from the start of the operation reception period. If there is no, the display is made over the entire period of the operation reception period until the end timing of the operation reception period.

  That is, in the feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment, when there is no operation of the selected operation unit during the operation reception period (019SGS418; N and 019SG419; N), the post-operation effect corresponding to the selected operation unit is performed. It is not executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the variable display being executed is a jackpot display result (specific display result) (step 019SGS420a). Whether or not the variable display result of the variable display being executed becomes a big hit display result (specific display result) is determined by whether or not the process data being executed is process data corresponding to the big hit variation pattern. can do. When the variable display result of the variable display being executed does not become the jackpot display result (specific display result) (step 019SGS420a; N), the process proceeds to step 019SGS424. When the variable display result of the variable display being executed is the jackpot display result (specific display result) (step 019SGS420a; Y), the operation is further performed by the operation unit selected by the player, that is, step 019SGS418. It is determined whether or not the accepted operation unit is the push button 31B (step 019SGS421).

  When the operation unit selected by the player is the push button 31B (step 019SGS421; Y), the post-operation effect execution process for the push button is executed (step 019SGS422). In the post-operation effect execution process for push buttons in step 019SGS422, the push button post-operation effect execution execution flag is set at the time of transition from step 019SGS421, and a push button for executing the post-operation operation for push buttons Various settings such as setting process data for post-operation effects are executed, and after the push button post-operation effect execution flag is set, the push button post-operation effect processing is repeatedly executed for each timer interrupt. As a result, the post-operation for the push button is performed. When the post-push button operation effect process is executed at the end timing of the push button post-operation effect, the post-push button operation effect flag is cleared.

  On the other hand, if the operation unit selected by the player is not the push button 31B, that is, if it is the stick controller 31A (step 019SGS421; N), the post-operation operation effect execution process for the stick controller is executed (step 019SGS423). . In the post-operation presentation effect execution process for the stick controller in step 019SGS423, the stick controller post-operation effect execution execution flag is set at the time of transition from step 019SGS421, and the stick controller for executing the post-operation effect for the stick controller is executed. Various settings, such as setting process data for post-operation presentation, are executed, and the post-operation post-operation execution flag is set for the stick controller, so that post-operation post-operation presentation processing is repeatedly executed for each timer interrupt. As a result, the post-operation effect for the stick controller is executed. It should be noted that when the post-operation effect for the stick controller is executed at the end timing of the post-operation for the stick controller, the post-action post-operation effect execution flag is cleared.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer has expired (step 019SGS424). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 019SGS424; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left middle right decorative symbol (displayed 30 ms after the previous decorative symbol display switching time). Image data of a screen to be performed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 019SGS425). In this way, variable display control of decorative symbols is realized in the first image display device 019SG005A. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the first image display device. The data is output to 019SG005A and the second image display device 019SG005B. As such, the first image display device 019SG005A and the second image display device 019SG005B display the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variable display of the decorative design. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the variable display control timer (step 019 SGS426).

  If the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 019SGS427; N), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 019SGS427). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S173) (step 019SGS429). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step 019SGS428; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is awaited per special figure. The value is updated according to the process (step S173) (step 019SGS429). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, it will shift to control that stops variable display when it receives a symbol confirmation designation command.For example, variation pattern designation indicating a long variation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even when a command is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the special symbol variable display ends).

  In the process table used for variable display control of decorative symbols, process data during variable display of decorative symbols is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the decorative symbol variable display time. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n is timed out in the process of step 019SGS427, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and variable display control of decorative symbols based on the process table Ends.

  FIG. 9-19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed as the active display change effect processing (019SG405). In the active display change effect process, the effect control CPU 10 first determines whether or not the active display change effect executing flag is set (019SGS421). When the active display change effect execution flag is not set (019SGS421; N), the active display change effect start wait timer is decremented by 1 (019SGS422), and whether or not the active display change effect start wait timer has timed out. Determine (019 SGS423). When the active display change effect start wait timer has not timed out (019SGS423; N), the active display change effect process is terminated.

  If the active display change effect start waiting timer has timed out (019SGS423; Y), the active display change effect execution flag is set (019SGS424), and the first active display change effect determination process is executed in the above-described active display change effect determination process. Is determined (019SGS425). When execution of the first active display change effect is determined (019SGS425; Y), the active display change effect period timer is set as the first active display change effect period (019SGS426), and the final display mode of the active display and the roulette effect are set. The process table of the first active display change effect is selected according to the number of executions and the notification stage at each roulette effect (the display mode of the active display suggested by each roulette effect) (019SGS427).

  When the execution of the second active display change effect is determined in the above-described active display change effect determination process (019SGS425; N), the process table of the second active display change effect according to the final display mode of the active display. Is selected (019 SGS428).

  Then, after selecting the process table in 019SGS427 or 019SGS428, the effect control CPU 120 starts the active display change effect process timer (019SGS429) and controls the content of the first process data of the active display change effect ( 019SGS430), the active display change effect process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the active display change effect execution flag is set in 019SGS421 (019SGS421; Y), the value of the active display change effect process timer and the value of the active display change effect period timer are decremented by 1 (019SGS431, 019SGS432). ), It is determined whether or not the active display change effect period timer is timed out (019SGS433). When the active display change effect period timer is not timed out (019SGS433; N), it is further determined whether or not the active display change effect process timer is timed out (019SGS434).

  When the active display change effect process timer has timed out (019SGS434; Y), the active display change effect process data is switched (019SGS435), the next active display change effect process timer is started (019SGS436), and 019SGS437. Proceed to If the active display change effect process timer has not timed out (019SGS434; N), the process proceeds to 019SGS437 without executing 019SGS435 and 019SGS436.

  In 019SGS437, the effect control CPU 120 performs control according to the content of the active display change effect process data (019SGS437), and ends the active display change effect process.

  If the active display change effect period timer has expired in 019SGS433 (019SGS433; Y), the value of the display mode flag in the active display buffer is updated to a value corresponding to the final display mode of active display (019SGS438). Then, the active display notice effect executing flag is cleared (019SGS439), and the active display change effect process is terminated.

  Note that the active display is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display mode flag by performing the hold display / active display update process (019SGS162) shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the CPU 120 for effect control executes the effect process during variable display and the active display change effect process, the variable display is executed in the super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once. As shown in 9-20 (A), the shutter image is displayed on the second image display device 019SG005B for 3 seconds from the timing when 7 seconds have passed since the start of variable display, and the shutter image on the second image display device 019SG005B. Other images are hidden. When 3 seconds have elapsed (when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display), the display of the shutter image on the second image display device 019SG005B ends, and the decorative design temporarily stops for 3 seconds on the first image display device 019SG005A. To do. During the temporary stop, the roulette effect is executed in the second image display device 019SG005B, and the final display mode of the active display is notified by the effect result of the roulette effect.

  When the roulette effect ends (after 13 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display), the first image display device 019SG005A starts revariable display (revariation) of decorative symbols. Thereafter, the action effect is executed from the timing when the decorative symbol re-variable display is started, and the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode at the timing when 15 seconds have passed since the variable display was started.

  In the case where variable display is executed with a variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once, the active display changes to the final display mode from the timing when the display of the shutter image is started in the second image display device 019SG005B. 8 seconds until this time corresponds to the execution period of the first active display change effect.

  In addition, when variable display is executed with a super-reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (B), 3 seconds from the timing when 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display. The shutter image is displayed on the second image display device 019SG005B for a second, and images other than the shutter image on the second image display device 019SG005B are concealed. When 3 seconds have elapsed (when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display), the display of the shutter image on the second image display device 019SG005B ends, and the decorative design temporarily stops for 3 seconds on the first image display device 019SG005A. To do. During the temporary stop, the first roulette effect is executed in the second image display device 019SG005B, and the display result of the active display is suggested by the effect result of the first roulette effect.

  When the first roulette effect ends (after 13 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display), the first image display device 019SG005A starts revariable display (revariation) of decorative symbols. Next, the shutter image is displayed on the second image display device 019SG005B for 3 seconds from the timing when 17 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display, and images other than the shutter image on the second image display device 019SG005B are concealed. When 3 seconds elapse (20 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display), the display of the shutter image on the second image display device 019SG005B ends, and the decorative design temporarily stops for 3 seconds on the first image display device 019SG005A. To do. During the temporary stop, the second roulette effect is executed in the second image display device 019SG005B, and the final display mode of the active display is notified by the effect result of the second roulette effect. Thereafter, the action effect is executed from the timing when the decorative symbol re-variable display is started, and the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode at the timing when 25 seconds have elapsed after the variable display is started.

  When variable display is executed with a variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice, the active display is changed to the final display mode from the timing at which the shutter image display is first started in the second image display device 019SG005B. 18 seconds until the change corresponds to the execution period of the first active display change effect.

  In addition, when variable display is performed with a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed three times, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (C), 3 seconds from the timing when 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display. The shutter image is displayed on the second image display device 019SG005B for a second, and images other than the shutter image on the second image display device 019SG005B are concealed. When 3 seconds have elapsed (when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display), the display of the shutter image on the second image display device 019SG005B ends, and the decorative design temporarily stops for 3 seconds on the first image display device 019SG005A. To do. During the temporary stop, the first roulette effect is executed in the second image display device 019SG005B, and the display result of the active display is suggested by the effect result of the first roulette effect.

  When the first roulette effect ends (after 13 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display), the first image display device 019SG005A starts revariable display (revariation) of decorative symbols. Next, the shutter image is displayed on the second image display device 019SG005B for 3 seconds from the timing when 17 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display, and images other than the shutter image on the second image display device 019SG005B are concealed. When 3 seconds elapse (20 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display), the display of the shutter image on the second image display device 019SG005B ends, and the decorative design temporarily stops for 3 seconds on the first image display device 019SG005A. To do. During the temporary stop, the second roulette effect is executed in the second image display device 019SG005B, and the display result of the active display is suggested by the effect result of the second roulette effect.

  Furthermore, when the second roulette effect is completed (23 seconds have elapsed since the start of variable display), the first image display device 019SG005A starts revariable display (revariation) of decorative symbols. Next, the shutter image is displayed on the second image display device 019SG005B for 3 seconds from the timing when 27 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display, and images other than the shutter image on the second image display device 019SG005B are concealed. When 3 seconds elapse (30 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display), the display of the shutter image in the second image display device 019SG005B is finished, and the decorative design temporarily stops for 3 seconds in the first image display device 019SG005A. To do. During the temporary stop, the third roulette effect is executed in the second image display device 019SG005B, and the final display mode of the active display is notified by the effect result of the second roulette effect. Thereafter, the action effect is executed from the timing when the decorative symbol re-variable display is started, and the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode at the timing when 35 seconds have elapsed after the variable display is started.

  When variable display is executed with a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times, the active display is changed to the final display mode from the timing when the shutter image display is first started in the second image display device 019SG005B. 18 seconds until the change corresponds to the execution period of the first active display change effect.

  As described above, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice or more, the roulette effect is executed for 3 seconds in accordance with the pseudo-continuous effect, and after the roulette effect ends, a predetermined period (for example, FIG. 9-20 ( B) and the roulette effect are further executed over 3 seconds in accordance with the pseudo-continuous effect executed at the timing when 7 seconds in the example shown in FIG. 9-20 (C). That is, in the feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment, when a plurality of roulette effects are executed during one variable display, the execution periods of the respective roulette effects do not overlap.

  Also, when variable display is executed with a super-reach variation pattern that does not execute pseudo-continuous effects, as shown in FIG. 9-21, the effect is applied for 5 seconds from the timing when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display. Perform the production. Then, when 5 seconds elapse (15 seconds have elapsed from the start of variable display), the display mode of active display changes to the final display mode.

  The first active display change effect and the second active display change effect shown in FIGS. 9-20 and 9-21 are both executed in a period before the reach timing.

  FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed as the operation unit selection effect execution processing (019SGS414). In the operation unit selection effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the operation unit selection effect process timer is operating (019 SGS441). When the operation unit selection effect process timer is not in operation (019SGS441; N), the operation unit selection effect process table is selected (019SGS442), the operation unit selection effect process timer is started (019SGS443), and the operation unit selection effect process is started. The first process data is controlled (019SGS444), the first image display device 019SG005A starts displaying the image of the operation unit (push button 31B and stick controller 31A) (019SGS445), and the operation unit selection effect execution process is performed. Exit.

  On the other hand, when the operation part selection effect process timer is operating in 019SGS441 (019SGS441; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the operation part selection effect process timer (019SGS446), and the operation part selection effect process timer is It is determined whether the timer has expired (019 SGS447). If the operation unit selection effect process timer has timed out (019SGS447; Y), it is determined whether or not the operation unit selection effect process timer that has timed out is the last operation unit selection effect process timer (019SGS448). When the operation unit selection effect process timer that has timed out is not the last operation unit selection effect process timer (019SGS448; N), the operation unit selection effect process data is switched (019SGS449), and the next operation unit selection effect process timer is selected. Is started (019 SGS450).

  If the operation unit selection effect process timer has not timed out in 019SGS447 (019SGS447; N), the process data content is controlled based on the value of the operation unit selection effect process timer (019SGS451).

  After execution of the process of 019SGS450 or 019SGS451, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cross key 019SG300 has been operated (019SGS452). When the cross key 019SG300 is operated (019SGS452; Y), the operation unit selected based on the operation direction of the cross key 019SG300 is specified (019SGS453), and the image of the operation unit selected based on the variable display result is displayed. It is determined whether to change to the big hit notification mode (019SGS454).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the change of the selected operation unit image to the big hit notification mode is determined at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 70%. The non-execution of the change to the jackpot notification mode of the image of the selected operation unit is determined. When the variable display result is lost, it is determined to execute the change to the jackpot notification mode of the image of the operation unit selected at a rate of 0%, and the jackpot notification of the image of the operation unit selected at a rate of 100% is determined. Determine non-execution of changes to aspects.

  Returning to FIG. 9-22, after executing 019SGS454, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the change to the big hit notification mode is determined in 019SGS454 (019SGS455). When execution of the change to the jackpot notification mode is determined (019SGS455; Y), display of the selected operation unit image in the jackpot notification mode is started (019SGS456), and the operation unit selection effect execution process ends. Further, when there is no operation of the cross key 019SG300 (019SGS452; N), or when non-execution of the change to the big hit notification mode is determined (019SGS455; N), the operation unit selection effect execution process is ended.

  If the last operation unit selection effect process timer has timed out in 019SGS448 (019SGS448; Y), the display of the operation unit image on the first image display device 019SG005A is ended (019SGS457), and the operation unit selection effect execution process is performed. Exit.

  Next, display modes of the first image display device 019SG005A and the second image display device 019SG005B when executing the active display change effect and the operation unit selection effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-24 to 9-28. FIGS. 9-24 to 9-28 are examples of the case where variable display is executed with the super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice.

  In the first active display change effect, first, as shown in FIGS. 9-24 (A) to (C), when a predetermined time (7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of variable display, the second image display device 019SG005B The shutter image is displayed for 3 seconds, the first reserved storage display area 019SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 019SG005U, the active display area 019SG005P (in the figure, only the first reserved storage display area 019SG005D and the active display area 019SG005P) Is hidden. When the display of the shutter image is finished and the decorative design is temporarily stopped in the first image display device 019SG005A, the first roulette effect is started in the second image display device 019SG005B.

  In the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (D), the second image display device 019SG005B has a circular shape in which magnifications (for example, x1, x2, x3, etc.) are displayed in each of the four areas. The roulette is displayed, and the highlighted area changes in order. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (D), the acquired number of change balls is displayed on the second image display device 019SG005B according to the magnification of the region highlighted when the change finally stops. The As will be described later, the color of the active display is changed to a color with a high expectation level according to the number of change balls acquired in the action effect, so the final display mode of the active display is suggested by the number of change balls acquired. It will be. For example, if the number of change balls acquired is 2, it changes from white to blue to green, which suggests that the final display mode of active display is green. The number of change balls acquired in one roulette effect depends on the predetermined final display mode of active display and the number of re-variable display (re-variation) in the pseudo-continuous effect, that is, the number of executions of the roulette effect. Will be determined. Thereafter, when the decorative image revariable display (revariation) is started in the first image display device 019SG005A, as shown in FIGS. 9-24 (F) to 9-24 (H), the second image display device The display of the shutter image and the second roulette effect in 019SG005B are executed.

  Next, in the second and subsequent re-variable display (re-variation) in the pseudo-continuous effect, as shown in FIGS. 9-24 (H) and 9-25 (I), the roulette effect is executed. In the roulette effect in the second and subsequent revariable display (revariation), as shown in FIG. 9-24 (H), the second image display device 019SG005B is the same as the roulette effect in the first revariable display (revariation). In addition, a circular roulette in which the magnification is displayed in each of the four areas is displayed, and the highlighted areas change in order. At this time, unlike the roulette effect in the first re-variable display (re-variation), the second image display device 019SG005B displays the number of acquired change balls already acquired. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (I), acquisition of a change ball displayed on the second image display device 019SG005B according to the magnification of the region highlighted when the change finally stops. The number is added and updated. Thereafter, when the pseudo-continuous effect still remains, the above-described shutter effect and roulette effect are further executed.

  In addition, after the roulette effect, when no pseudo-continuous effect remains (when all the pseudo-continuous effects in the variable display are executed), it is shown in FIGS. 9-25 (J) and 9-25 (K). As described above, the effect effect that the change ball acquired as a result of the roulette effect acts on the active display area 019SG005P is executed, and the active display changes to the final display mode according to the number of change balls that acted on the active display area 019SG005P. . For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-25 (J) and 9-25 (K), when there are four change balls acting on the active display area 019SG005P, the active display is a final display mode provided in advance. It changes to gold which has the second highest jackpot expectation degree among blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors in the order of the big hit expectation degree.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (K), when all the changing balls act on the active display area 019SG005P and the active display changes to the final display mode, a series of first active display change effects are completed. To do.

  The second active display change effect is executed during variable display without execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (during variable display with the variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β shown in FIG. 9-5). Yes.

  In the second active display change effect, the action effects shown in FIGS. 9-26 (A) and 9-26 (B) are executed from the beginning. In the action effect in the second active display change effect, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (B), the character is displayed on the second image display device 019SG005B, and the character is activated on the active display area 019SG005P. The display mode changes to the final display mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (C), when the active display changes to the final display mode, the second active display change effect ends.

  Next, the execution status of the operation unit selection effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-27 to 9-28.

  The operation unit selection effect is executed in the reach effect of super reach during variable display. For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 (A) to (C), the reach design of the super reach is executed by the decorative design of the first image display device 019SG005A in the reach mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 (D) and 9-27 (E), the operation unit selection effect is executed during the execution of the super reach reach effect.

  In the operation section execution effect, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (D), an image simulating the stick controller 31A is displayed on the right side of the first image display device 019SG005A, and an image simulating the push button 31B is displayed on the left side. An image simulating the cross key 019SG300 is displayed at the center, and the message “Which one?” And “Select with the left and right of the cross key” are displayed above it, and either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is crossed. Selection is made by a key 019SG300.

  In this state, when an operation for selecting the right side or the left side is performed with the cross key 019SG300, as shown in FIG. 9-27 (E), the display mode of the image imitating the operation unit on the selected side changes. It is suggested that the operation unit has been selected. At this time, when the variable display result is a big hit and it is determined that the image of the operation unit is changed to the big hit notification mode, the display mode of the image imitating the selected operation unit is the big hit notification. It changes to the aspect.

  If the cross key 019SG300 is not operated within the operation reception period of the cross key 019SG300, the effect control CPU 120 may select the operation unit at random or select only one predetermined operation unit. (For example, only the push button 31B may be uniquely selected).

  When the push button 31B is selected in the operation unit selection effect, when the reach effect progresses, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (F), the image imitating the push button 31B on the first image display device 019SG005A. At the same time, a message “Press!” Is displayed to prompt the user to operate the push button 31B. In this state, when the push button 31B is operated, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (G), the first image display device 019SG005A has an effect result indicating whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (in the figure, An effect that leads to a jackpot effect) is performed, and finally an effect result (variable display result) is displayed. Thereafter, the variable display of the decorative design ends, and the variable display result is derived.

  Further, when the stick controller 31A is selected in the operation unit selection effect, when the reach effect progresses, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (H), “Close!” Together with an image imitating the stick controller 31A. A message is displayed to prompt the operation of the stick controller 31A. When the stick controller 31A is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (I), an effect result indicating whether the variable display result is a big hit or not (in the figure, an effect result showing a big hit) is displayed. The leading effect is performed, and finally the effect result (variable display result) is displayed. Thereafter, the variable display of the decorative design ends, and the variable display result is derived.

  If the variable display result is a big hit, the post-push button operation effect is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 9-28 (G) based on the operation of the push button 31B, while the stick controller 31A. The effect after the stick controller operation is executed in the form shown in FIG. 9-28 (I) (an aspect different from the effect after the push button operation) based on the operation of.

  It should be noted that, in the feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a big hit, different effects are produced when the push button 31B is operated and the stick controller 31A is operated during the reach effect of super reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display result is lost, the push button 31B is operated and the stick controller 31A is operated. It is only necessary to execute the same aspect effect (the same aspect effect that notifies the loss).

  As described above, in the feature part 019SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-24 and 9-25, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the roulette notice effect according to the variation pattern for executing variable display. In addition, the display mode of the active display is changed by applying the change ball acquired by the roulette effect to the active display area 019SG005P, and the expected degree of jackpot is suggested by the display mode of the active display after the change. In addition, since the CPU 120 for effect control may repeatedly execute the roulette effect at this time, it is possible to arouse the unexpectedness of the player and improve the game entertainment.

  In the feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment, the period from the start of one variable display to the change of the display mode of the active display is exemplified as the “predetermined period” in the present invention. The predetermined period is a period that spans a plurality of variable displays, and the shutter image at the second image display device 019SG005B as a precursor effect in the present invention during the predetermined period that spans the variable displays. And a roulette effect as a change notice effect in the present invention may be executed.

  In addition, in the feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-25, the action effect is executed immediately after the display of all the shutter images and the roulette effect are finished (immediately after the predetermined period in the present invention has elapsed). However, after the predetermined period in the present invention has ended, another effect is once executed, and after the effect is executed, the action effect is executed again to activate the active display. You may make it change the display mode of a display.

  Further, in the feature part 019SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (J), as the effect, a plurality of change balls are displayed in the same manner on the second image display device 019SG005B, and these change balls are displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, but the display mode of the active display changes according to the number of balls that have changed in the active display area 019SG005P. As an effect, the change ball can be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and the active display depends on which display mode the change ball acts on the active display area 019SG005P (for example, in FIG. 9-15). It may be different whether the color changes to blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the roulette effect a plurality of times during the variable display of 1, a new one is started from the timing when 7 seconds have elapsed from the end of the 1 roulette effect. The roulette effects are executed, that is, the execution periods of the roulette effects are not overlapped. For this reason, the player can be prevented from being confused and misunderstood that one roulette effect and another roulette effect executed after the one roulette effect are one roulette effect. ing.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 019SG of the present embodiment, an example in which the execution periods of a plurality of roulette effects executed during 1 variable display are not overlapped is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of these At least part of the execution period of the roulette effect may overlap. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period required for the entire execution of the roulette effect, and to improve the effect by increasing the information amount of the image displayed on the first image display device 019SG005A as the roulette effect. You can improve your entertainment interests.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-20, during the variable display, a pseudo-continuous effect that performs temporary stop and re-variable display (revariation) of the decorative symbols can be executed, and the pseudo-continuous effect is one roulette effect. Is started during a period of 7 seconds when the next roulette effect starts. For this reason, even during the period when the roulette effect is not executed, the player can be paid attention to the temporary stop and the re-variable display of the decorative symbols as the pseudo-continuous effect. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the roulette effect is not being executed by executing the pseudo-continuous effect.

  In addition, in the feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment, when variable display is performed with a super reach variation pattern with pseudo-continuous effects, variable display is performed with a super reach variation pattern without pseudo-continuous effects. The variable display result is a big hit at a higher rate than the case. When variable display is executed in a super reach variation pattern with pseudo-continuous effects, the first active display change effect including the roulette notice effect is always executed and the display mode of the active display changes, When variable display is performed with a super reach variation pattern that does not involve continuous effects, the second active display change effect that does not include the roulette notice effect is always executed, and the display mode of the active display changes. In other words, when the display mode of the active display changes through the roulette effect, the rate of control to the big hit gaming state is higher than when the display mode of the active display changes without passing through the roulette effect. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the performance is executed, it is possible to further improve the gaming interest.

  In the feature part 019SG of the present embodiment, when the display mode of the active display changes through the roulette effect, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state than when the display mode of the active display changes without passing through the roulette effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display mode of the active display changes through the roulette effect, the display mode of the active display without the roulette effect The ratio of control to the big hit gaming state may be lower than when the game changes, and when the display mode of the active display changes via the roulette effect, the display mode of the active display changes without the roulette effect The ratio of controlling to the big hit gaming state may be the same in the case where the game is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 and 9-28, during the reach effect of the super reach, the player performs an effect (post-operation effect) for notifying the variable display result in the operation part selection effect. Since the operation unit to be operated can be selected from the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A and the post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation of the selected operation unit, the player can operate by operating the operation unit desired by the player. Post-production will be executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  The feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which an operation unit operated by a player is selected during the reach of super reach, and a post-operation effect is executed according to the operation of the selected operation unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gesture or the like performed by the player during the reach of the super reach is selected from a plurality of modes, and the selected operation is executed. Depending on the situation, the post-operation effect may be executed. In other words, the operation in the present invention includes both operating a specific operation unit provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the player's operation itself such as a gesture. It is out.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-28, when the push button 31B is selected by the player during the execution of the operation unit selection effect, the post-operation effect for the push button is executed according to the operation of the push button 31B. When the stick controller 31A is selected by the player during the execution of the operation unit selection effect, the post-operation effect for the stick controller is different from the effect after the push button operation according to the operation of the stick controller 31A. Since it is executed, that is, a different post-operation effect is executed depending on the selected operation unit, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 019SG of this Embodiment, although the form after which the post-operation effect which is different according to the selected operation part is illustrated is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, It selects and selects. Regardless of the operation unit, the post-operation effect in the same mode may be executed.

  In addition, a cross key 019SG300 is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an operation unit that can be operated by the player, in addition to the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. In the operation unit selection effect, the player operates by operating the cross key 019SG300. By making the operation unit selectable from the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, it is possible to prevent the operation of selecting the operation unit operated by the player for executing the post-operation effect from becoming difficult to understand. .

  In the feature part 019SG of the present embodiment, an example in which an operation part to be operated in order to execute a post-operation effect by operating the cross key 019SG300 can be selected from the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. The present invention is not limited to this, and the operation unit operated to execute the post-operation effect may be determined by the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

  Also, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the player selects the operation unit as the operation unit selection effect, the selected is displayed on the first image display device 019SG005A. Since the image of the operation unit may change to a mode for notifying the jackpot (a big hit notification mode), the player's unexpectedness is changed by changing the image of the operation unit selected in this way to a mode for notifying the jackpot. Can be aroused and can improve the game entertainment.

  In the feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment, when the player selects the operation unit as the operation unit selection effect, the display mode of the image of the selected operation unit displayed on the first image display device 019SG005A is the same. Although an example is shown in which it is possible to notify that the variable display result is a big hit by changing, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the player selects the operation unit as the operation unit selection effect In addition, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit may be suggested by changing the display mode of the image of the selected operation unit displayed on the first image display device 019SG005A to any one of a plurality of modes.

  In addition, as described above, in the feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment, the operation unit selection effect and the post-operation only during variable display with the super reach variation pattern having a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach or non-reach variation pattern. Since the performance can be executed, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the player will be controlled to the big hit gaming state by executing the operation portion selection effect, and to improve the game entertainment.

  In the feature unit 019SG of the present embodiment, the operation unit selection effect and the post-operation effect can be executed only during variable display with the super reach variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the operation unit selection effect and the post-operation effect may be executable during variable display with some normal reach and non-reach variation patterns.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-18, when an operation unit that is not selected by the player in the operation unit selection effect is operated during the operation reception period of the operation unit for executing each post-operation effect, Since the subsequent post-operation effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player's selection in the operation unit selection effect from being wasted and the gaming interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, in the feature part 019SG of the present embodiment, the post-operation effect is not executed when an operation unit that is not selected by the player in the operation unit selection effect is operated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the selected operation unit may be executed even when an operation unit that is not selected by the player in the operation unit selection effect is operated. By doing so, it is possible to omit the process of determining whether or not the operation unit selected by the player has been operated in the operation unit selection effect, and thus it is possible to reduce the impossibility of control by the effect control CPU 120.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 019SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. Are also included in the present invention.

  For example, in the feature unit 019SG of the above-described embodiment, when the roulette effect is executed, a change in the display mode of the active display is surely notified as the effect result of the roulette effect (a change ball can be acquired). Although illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, You may provide the case where the display mode of an active display does not change as an effect result of this roulette effect. Furthermore, in the characteristic part 019SG of the above embodiment, the form of executing the roulette effect for the active display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the roulette effect is executed for the hold display. May be.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 9-29 as the modified example 019SG-1, when the roulette effect is executed, the second image display device 019SG005B has a magnification (for example, x0, x1, x2) in each of the four areas. , X3, etc.) are displayed, and the highlighted area is changed in order. When the area highlighted when the change finally stops is a magnification other than 0, a change ball corresponding to the magnification is obtained (the change stage of the display mode of the active display or the hold display is changed). In addition, the number of successful roulette effects in the first image display device 019SG005A is updated and displayed. By doing in this way, the player can recognize the frequency | count that the change of the display mode of active display (or hold display) was alert | reported as an effect result of a roulette effect.

  On the other hand, when the area highlighted when the change finally stops is 0, the change ball cannot be acquired, and the number of successful roulette effects in the first image display device 019SG005A is not updated and displayed.

  After all the roulette effects are finished, as shown in FIGS. 9-29 (G) and 9-29 (H), the action effects are performed on the hold display and the active display area 019SG005P. The display mode of display or active display may be changed to the final display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 9-29, in the present modification 019SG-1, a plurality of roulette effects are executed during one variable display, and the display mode of the hold display is the final display mode based on the results of these roulette effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these roulette effects may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. In addition, when the roulette effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays in this way, each time a change ball is acquired as an effect result of writing the roulette effect (every time a change in the display mode of the hold display is notified) The display mode may be changed.

  In addition, in the feature unit 019SG of the above-described embodiment, when variable display is executed in a super reach variation pattern with pseudo-continuous effects, a roulette effect is always executed according to each pseudo-continuous effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case where the roulette effect is not executed according to the pseudo-continuous effect may be provided. In particular, as shown in FIG. 9-30 as modified example 019SG-2, whether or not the roulette effect is executed every time the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (every time the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped) depends on the variable display result. By deciding at a different ratio, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which roulette effect is executed at the time of execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the number of times the roulette effect is executed, thereby improving the gaming interest. . Further, when the execution of the roulette effect is determined, the shutter image is displayed at the timing before the execution of the roulette effect. However, even when the non-execution of the roulette effect is determined, the second image display device 019SG005B displays the shutter image. You may provide the case where it performs. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the roulette effect is executed after the shutter image is displayed, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 019SG of the above embodiment, the decorative design is temporarily stopped as a part of the pseudo-continuous effect during the period of 7 seconds after the end of the roulette effect. The effect executed during the 7-second period after the end of the roulette effect is not limited, and the variable display result of the variable display is suggested by the display of a specific image, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. An effect other than a pseudo-continuous effect, such as an effect to be performed, may be used.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 019SG of the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated. A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of wagers, and a variable display result is derived to an effect display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that is finished and can receive a prize according to the variable display result derived to the effect display device.

1 Pachinko machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Production display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Detection means capable of detecting a plurality of types of movements of the player;
Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the fact that any one of the plurality of types of actions is detected by the detection means;
An effect corresponding to each of a plurality of types of motion that can be detected by the detection means, and a promotion effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of motion promotion effects that prompt the user to perform the corresponding action,
A selection means capable of selecting a type of motion promotion effect executed by the promotion effect execution means at a predetermined timing before the motion promotion effect is executed when the motion promotion effect is executed by the promotion effect execution means;
With
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect based on the fact that an operation corresponding to the action promotion effect executed by the promotion effect execution means is detected by the detection means.

Images